JP2021122631A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which achieves enriched attractiveness.SOLUTION: A game machine includes special state control means capable of controlling a game state to a special state in which variable display is easily executed, termination determination means for determining the termination of a specific state in the specific state easily controlled to an advantageous state by lottery, and notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that can notify a player whether the specific state is terminated or a specific display result is derived and displayed, related to the control of the specific state. The special state control means can control the game state to the special state when a special condition is satisfied, and control the game state to the special state after the termination determination means determines that the specific state is terminated after the special condition is satisfied, when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state that is easily controlled to the advantageous state. The notification performance execution means can notify the player that the game state is controlled to the special state by the notification performance, when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which the hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the number of special figure games executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 1000 times (the special number of times), the big hit (advantageous state) does not occur (special). (Conditions are satisfied), the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state, and the probability that a big hit is decided as a result of the special figure game is increased to about 1/100, and the big hit is likely to occur in the subsequent special figure games. It is stated that. Further, in Patent Document 1, when a big hit does not occur even if the number of times of the special figure game (the number of times of executing the variable display) reaches 1000 times in the normal game state, a time saving state is generated instead of the probability changing state. It is stated that it may be a thing.

JP-A-2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.)

However, with conventional gaming machines, it has been insufficient to examine the interests when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a special number or during the period before and after that.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine rich in interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and executes a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). ) Is derived and displayed, and is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter). (For example, a portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). (For example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 in the first embodiment) and a specific state that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state. A specific state control means that can control a state (for example, a high probability state) (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment) and a lottery to determine to end the specific state in the specific state. The end determination means (for example, the portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the modification 2) and the normal state control means that can control the normal state based on the determination by the end determination means (for example, steps 061IWS5704A, S5712A in the modification 2). Notification effect (for example, fanning reach A to C shown in FIGS. 10-9) capable of notifying whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state and the part to be executed). ) (For example, a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in the modification 2 and the processing of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the states of the fanning reach flags A to C). The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, step 061IWS5603A in the first embodiment). , S5603B), the special state control means has a specific value (for example, a relief time reduction counter) in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By setting the value of to "0"), it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied. Yes (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state is terminated by the end determination means after the special condition is satisfied. A portion that is controllable to a special state after it has been determined to do so (eg, in variant 2 where steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A-S5709A are performed. (See FIG. 10-11), the notification effect execution means is controlled to the special state when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state (for example, FIGS. 10-9 (3-2), (4). It is characterized in that it can be notified by the fan reach B) shown in.
According to such a configuration, even when the specific state ends, the player is relieved because the notification effect notifies that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition. It can be given and the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 116IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 116IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in the feature part 116IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing in a feature part 116IW. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the control example of a game state. It is a time chart for demonstrating the control example of the game state in the modification 1-1. It is a time chart for demonstrating the control example of the game state in the modification 1-2. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the time saving rush effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the time saving rush effect in the modification 1-3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the control of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the probable change fall in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing in modification 2. It is a timing chart which shows the timing to execute each effect in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the fanning reach in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the relief time reduction establishment notification in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control example of the game state in the modification 2.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 holds the bottom surface member in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for gaming effects are provided around the gaming area. ..

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first start winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes the process of deciding which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol fluctuation processing is completed. do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol. The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 116IW)
Next, the feature portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to one of a low probability / low base state (normal state), a low probability / high base state, a high probability / high base state, and a high probability / low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, which is compared with the normal state. In the game, the probability of being "per the average" increases. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball is used in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening) described later. Will be easier to win. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening) is formed by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize. Further, in the configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) shown in FIG. 1 is provided, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is used as compared with the normal state. The game ball may be made easier to win.

Further, in this example, in the high probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is higher than in the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as a time saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as a probability change state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state) after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is displayed. It may be controlled to the time saving state (high base state) based on the derivation display. Hereinafter, the time saving state (high base state) in which the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled after the big hit game is completed is also referred to as a time saving state via the big hit, and the time saving state controlled based on the derivation display of the time saving out-of-time symbol. (High base state) is also referred to as a time saving state via a time saving gap.

Further, in this example, even if the next big hit does not occur even after the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the big hit occurs, the time is shortened. It may be controlled to a state (high base state) (hereinafter, the time saving state (high base state) controlled by such a process is also referred to as a time saving state via a relief time saving, or simply a relief time saving. Also called). In this example, after the relief time reduction occurs, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed without the next big hit, the relief time reduction is not controlled again. However, not limited to such a configuration, if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed without the next big hit occurring even after the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction is controlled again. It may be configured so that it may occur. Further, for example, even if the next big hit or the time saving loss does not occur even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the time saving loss occurs, the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled. It may be configured so that it may occur.

In the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening) and variable Control to lengthen the opening time of the winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed. All controls may be performed, or some of (1) to (4) may not be controlled. For example, which of the following (1) to (4) may be controlled may differ between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, in a low base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be 1/1, or the probability of hitting a normal figure may be extremely low and the probability of hitting a normal figure may be substantially 1/1. That is, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control of the above (1) is not performed, a part or all of the above (2) to (4) are controlled so that the high base state is obtained. You may.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are defined as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, in the case of the set value "6" having the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time reductions N is 108 to. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time reductions N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and the above provisions are satisfied regardless of which setting value is set. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in this example, and at least when the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability is set, the configuration may be configured to satisfy the above provisions.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 108IW, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

(First Embodiment)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-40.

(Front view of pachinko machine)
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, a winning ball device 6A is provided as a first starting winning opening near the substantially center of the game area below the image display device 5, but in this example, it is shown in FIG. 9-1. As described above, as the first starting winning opening, the winning ball device 061IW6Aa is provided near the substantially center of the game area below the image display device 5, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is provided on the right side of the game area. (Therefore, in this example, two first starting winning openings of the winning ball device 061IW6Aa and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab are provided). The configuration of the winning ball device 061IW6Aa is the same as the configuration of the winning ball device 6A shown in FIG.

The variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is configured to have the same configuration as the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is variable. If the winning ball device 061IW6Ab is in the closed state, it moves on the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the special variable winning ball device 7 below it. On the other hand, the game ball that has fallen on the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab can enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab and win a prize at the first starting winning opening if the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is in the open state. ..

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab. The configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 116IW will be described later.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a winning ball device 061IW6B as a second starting winning opening is provided on the left side of the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, in this example, the winning ball device 061IW6B is provided as the second starting winning opening instead of the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. In this example, when the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is in the closed state, the game ball falls on the special variable winning ball device 7, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. A game ball can be won in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening by moving on the ball device 7 from the upper right to the lower left.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a variable winning ball device 061IW17 is provided as a special winning opening instead of the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 061IW17 is provided with a rod-shaped member 061IW17a at the bottom, and when the rod-shaped member 061IW17a moves from the back side to the front when viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine, the variable winning ball device 061IW17 is opened. , A game ball can be won in the variable winning ball device 061IW17 as a special winning opening.

In this example, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player is on the left side of the gaming area in order to aim for winning the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening. Perform a firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at. Further, when the game state is controlled to the probability change state (high probability state) or the high base state, or when the game state is controlled to the big hit game state, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening or special In order to aim at winning the variable winning ball device 7 and the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening, a firing operation (right-handed operation) is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. The right-handed game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab by the row of nails 061IW19 provided on the right side of the game area, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the open state. Depending on whether it is in the closed state, it is possible to win a prize in any of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 7, or the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening.

Also in this example, when the variation display result of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit, the variable winning ball device 061IW17 as a special winning opening is controlled to be in the open state. However, unlike the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, it is rare for a right-handed gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 061IW17, and it is rare for a gaming ball to win a special winning opening. Therefore, in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, as in the second embodiment described later, the high probability / low base state, the high probability / high base state, and the low probability / high base state Although it can be controlled to the game state, it is different from the second embodiment described later in that it has no meaning as a KT state in which the game ball is easily won in the special winning opening.

In this example, the high probability / low base state is also referred to as the first probability change state, and the high probability / high base state is also referred to as the second probability change state.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 116IW. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 061IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and in the big hit game state, the bottom surface member 061IW108 is provided. By moving the bottom member 061IW108 backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the feature unit 116IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the game ball winning in the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance path 061IW100 provided on the left side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance path 061IW100 is further branched into two paths 061IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 061IW100 is guided to the right side path 061IW102 or the left side path 061IW103. When guided to the right path 061IW102, the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 061IW106. When guided to the left path 061IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 061IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 061IW107.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, a V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is provided near the entrance of the right side path 061IW102, and when the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is in the open state, a game guided to the guidance path 061IW100. The ball can enter the right path 061IW102 and enter the V region 061IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 061IW100 enters the left side path 061IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 061IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 061IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 116IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the big hit game, and is detected by the V area switch 061IW106 after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 061IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 061IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 061IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 061IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 061IW104 and the discharge region 061IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it may be configured to determine a large winning opening / exit mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 9-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 116IW. In this feature portion 116IW, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch (first count switch). In addition to the detection signals from the 23 and the second count switch 24), the detection signals from the V region switch 061IW106 and the discharge region switch 061IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the feature unit 116IW, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories and the grand prize opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, transmission is performed to the solenoid 061IW109 for the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability, time saving loss probability)
FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability for each set value in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability are different depending on whether the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed. It is the same. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536" (about 1/319), which is for the player. This is the most unfavorable setting. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "242/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/270), which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest (about 1/32), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2420/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/27), which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62886/65536" regardless of whether it is a probabilistic state (state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) and 9-4 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set, the non-probability state (low probability state) and the probabilistic state (probability state) Regardless of whether it is in the high probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time reduction is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in Fig. 9-4, even if the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value as described above, while the small hit probability and the time saving loss probability are set to be constant, the time saving loss probability is as shown in FIG. 9-4. May be configured so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched by making the set values "1" to "6" different.

The example shown in FIG. 9-4 is an example, and various modes can be considered as a method of setting the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the time saving loss probability. For example, in this example, the time saving probability is common regardless of the type of the special symbol, but when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is about 1/400, and the second special symbol is used. When executing the variable display of the symbol, the time saving probability may be about 1/200, and conversely, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability may be about 1/200. It is 200, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability may be configured to be about 1/400.

Further, in this example, it is configured to be controllable to the time saving state triggered by the time saving loss, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a small hit with a time saving which is controlled to the time saving state triggered by the small hit is It may be configured as there is.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "6R jackpot A", "6R jackpot B", "6R jackpot B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. It is a table referred to for determining either "6R jackpot C" or "6R jackpot D".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the first embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "6R jackpot A" with a probability of 50%, and is determined to be "6R jackpot B" with a probability of 50%. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in the feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "6R jackpot C" with a 50% probability, and is determined to be "6R jackpot D" with a 50% probability.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. Control to execute the variable display is performed, but in this example, when the gaming state is a low base state (high probability / low base state, low probability / low base state), there is a general probability of 1/1000. It is decided to hit the figure, and in the case of a high base state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state), it is decided to hit the normal figure with a probability of 999/1000.

Further, in this example, when the gaming state is a low base state (high probability / low base state, low probability / low base state), the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is extremely short 0 when it hits a normal figure. . Controlled to open for 1 second. Therefore, in the low base state (high probability / low base state, low probability / low base state), winning the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening can hardly be expected. On the other hand, in the case of a high base state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state), the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab has elapsed or is variable for 5.5 seconds when it hits a normal figure. The winning ball device 061IW6Ab is controlled to be in the open state until 10 game balls are won.

(Time saving type)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In this example, the time saving state (high base state) is the time saving state A which is the time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the jackpot, and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the time saving loss. It is possible to distinguish between the state B and the time saving state C which is the time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the relief time saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when 6R jackpot A occurs in the normal state (low base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving is 100 times. When the 6R jackpot A is generated during the time saving state (high base state) and controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage can be changed according to the state of the game, and the interest can be improved. In this example, when any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, the time is shortened until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game, regardless of whether the occurrence state is the normal state or the time saving state. Controlled to state (high base state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when the time reduction occurs during the normal state and the time reduction state (high base state) is controlled, the time reduction state (high base state) is performed 100 times. State) is controlled. On the other hand, if the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction frequency is not updated. That is, in the time saving state (high base state), when the remaining number of times controlled in the time saving state (high base state) is 50 times, even if the time saving deviation occurs, the time saving state (high base state) is controlled. The remaining number of times is 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, the time saving deviation that occurs during the time saving state (high base state) is substantially invalid. Further, in this example, as will be described later, the time saving may not be determined in the probabilistic state (high probability state).

The method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is lost is not limited to that shown in FIG. 9-6. For example, when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled in the time reduction state (high base state) is set again (for example, set to 100 times). Alternatively, if the time reduction occurs only during the time reduction state (high base state) via the time reduction state (high base state), the time reduction state (high base state) is controlled. The remaining number of times may be set again. Further, for example, even when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving number is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the time saving number is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is, the time saving number is 0 times). It may be configured to fall from the state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case where the time reduction is lost.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times. As described above, in this example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss because the number of time saving is large.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this example, when the relief time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) via the jackpot or the time reduction deviation, the relief time reduction is updated while the relief time reduction is performed. The number of time reductions is not updated when the time reduction occurs during the including time reduction state (high base state). With such a configuration, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving can be secured, and the relief degree of the player can be increased (for example, the investment amount of the player can be suppressed).

In this example, even if the relief time is controlled to the time reduction state of 800 times and then the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the relief time is not controlled again.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. The relief time reduction arrival rate is the rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by fluctuating n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.
K = (1-ML) ⁿ = {(P-1) ÷ P} ⁿ
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = Big hit probability ML denominator, n = Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction deviation is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-6. For example, even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control so that the number of time-savings is 100 times in the normal state and the time-saving state. Further, for example, even when the same time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving number is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the time saving number is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is,). It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case where the time reduction is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
9-7 to 9-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the first embodiment of the feature portion 116IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9, 14 types of first variation patterns # A to #N for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. Thirteen types of # A to #M are used.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first special symbol for the low probability / low base state shown in FIG. 9-7 (A). The variation pattern table A is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the first variation patterns # A to # It is determined to be one of F.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), for the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). The variation pattern table B for the first special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the first variation pattern # G It is determined to be one of ~ # I.

In the first variation pattern table B for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), each first variation pattern # G is compared with the variation pattern table A for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7 (A). The fluctuation time specified by ~ # I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed. Will be done.

Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), for the high probability / high base state shown in FIG. 9-7 (C). The variation pattern table C for the first special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the first variation pattern # A In addition to ~ # F, it is determined to be one of the first fluctuation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), in the case of a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is off or a small hit, the first When the number of 1-hold storage is 0, the first fluctuation patterns # J and # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Further, when executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the case of the low probability / high base state, the variation for the first special symbol for the low probability / high base state shown in FIG. 9-8 (D). The pattern table D is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state, in addition to the first fluctuation patterns # A to # F, It is determined to be one of the first fluctuation patterns # J, # K, and # L.

As shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), in the low probability / high base state, if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is off or a small hit, the first reserved storage number is 0. If, the first fluctuation patterns # J and # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined. Further, as will be described later, the low probability / high base state ends when the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times is executed, but when the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation of the low probability / high base state is executed, the fluctuation time is executed. The first fluctuation pattern # L (special fluctuation pattern), which is 5 seconds, is determined.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened (when the value of the relief time reduction counter described later becomes 0), FIG. 9-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the first special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established as shown in the above is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-8 (E), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the case of the variation display that shortens the relief time, any one of the first variation patterns # M and # N is executed. Will be decided.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-8, the first variation patterns # M and #N are not used for the variation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, and are used only for the variation display that results in the relief time reduction. It is a time-specific fluctuation pattern. In this example, when the first fluctuation pattern #M (relief time reduction rush loss) is determined, the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) as described later. ) The time-saving rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-39 (B) and (C)) for notifying the fact is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state), and the interest when the relief time is shortened is improved. be able to.

Further, when the first fluctuation pattern # N (relief time saving rush pretending big hit) is determined, the time saving for notifying that the time saving state is controlled (that is, the relief time is controlled to the low probability / high base state) is notified. After executing the effect in the same manner as the rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-39 (B) and (C)), the effect of notifying that the jackpot will be a big hit is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the second for the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 9-9 (A). The variation pattern table A for a special symbol is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second variation pattern # A In addition to ~ # F, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the case of the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is off or a small hit, the first 2 When the number of reserved storages is 0, the second fluctuation patterns # J and # K having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the number of second reserved storages is 1 or more, the second fluctuation patterns # A and #D having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds are determined.

Further, when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is not in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), it is for a time other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 9-9 (B). The second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed when the probability / low base state (first probability variation state) is not high, the second variation pattern # G to Determined to be one of # I.

In the second special symbol variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), each second variation pattern # G is compared with the second special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 9-9 (A). The fluctuation time specified by ~ # I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, in a state other than the high probability / low base state (first probability change state) (low probability / low base state, high probability / high base state (second probability change state), low probability / high base state). When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the long variation with the variation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened (when the value of the relief time reduction counter described later becomes 0), FIG. 9-9 (C). The second special symbol variation pattern table E for when the relief time reduction is established as shown in the above is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the case of the variation display that shortens the relief time, any one of the second variation patterns # L and # M is executed. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-9, the second fluctuation patterns # L and #M are not used for the fluctuation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but are used only for the fluctuation display that results in the relief time reduction. Is. In this example, when the second fluctuation pattern # L (relief time reduction rush loss) is determined, the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to the low probability / high base state) as described later. ) The time-saving rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-39 (B) and (C)) for notifying the fact is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state), and the interest when the relief time is shortened is improved. be able to. Further, when the second fluctuation pattern #M (relief time saving rush pretending big hit) is determined, the time saving for notifying that the time saving state is controlled (that is, the relief time is controlled to the low probability / high base state) is notified. After executing the effect in the same manner as the rush effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-39 (B) and (C)), the effect of notifying that the jackpot will be a big hit is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the same fluctuation pattern table is used (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same) in each of the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the missed time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. ), But it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (that is, the average fluctuation time is different) depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the missed time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. For example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more likely to be determined by the fluctuation pattern with the shortened fluctuation time than the time saving state via the jackpot or the missed time saving, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. May be good. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) at the time of the loss. It may not be (or less determined) and the average variation time may be shorter. With such a configuration, if the relief time is shortened (that is, if a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the reach (or the reach with particularly high expectations) will not be missed, so it is necessary to suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 according to the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. First, with reference to FIG. 9-10 (1), the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), when the winning of the first game ball to the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 061IW109 is driven. The V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to be in the open state for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), in the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A, the predetermined detection valid period is after the extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101. , The period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9-10 (2), the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by the big hit game based on the 6R big hits B to D will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the 6R big hits B to D, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), when the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 061IW109 is driven. Then, the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V region 061IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to the closed state again and the large winning opening is controlled to the closed state, the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is also controlled to the closed state.

When the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 061IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), in the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpots B to D, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing is started. It is the period from when the plate 061IW101 is controlled to the closed state again until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), in the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpots B to D, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 061IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), in the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 061IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R jackpot B is 50% and it is easy to be controlled to the probabilistic state (see FIG. 9-5 (A)). 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, there is only a case where the 6R jackpot C or the 6R jackpot D is executed, so that it is easy to be controlled to the probabilistic state with a 100% probability (see FIG. 9-5 (B)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the case where the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 is controlled to the open state in the first round of the jackpot game is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the second round of the big hit game, the V region opening / closing plate 061IW101 may be controlled to be in the open state so that the V prize can be won, and various aspects are conceivable.

(Direction control command)
9-11 and 9-12 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. Is. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command should be out of line (no time reduction). be. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (time reduction loss designation command)) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command to be the time reduction deviation. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R jackpot A. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R jackpot B. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (6R jackpot C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is 6R jackpot C. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (6R jackpot D designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R jackpot D. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 116IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but instead of sending a display result designation command, each of the miss (no time reduction) / time reduction / 6R jackpot A / 6R jackpot B / 6R jackpot C / 6R jackpot D / small hit The variation pattern command may be determined in correspondence, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, the value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, the command is transmitted. The command 957E (H) is transmitted as a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and the command is uniformly designated as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is transmitted to.

The command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times 2, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, the command is transmitted. The command 9608 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration) that specifies the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration is set with a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the time for relief is shortened and transmitted. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, the command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and when the remaining number of times is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the two commands can be identifiable and transmitted in units of one time.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has ended. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in a specific gaming state such as a probability change state, a time saving state, or a KT state. In the feature unit 116IW, based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command or the first customer waiting demo display designation command on the effect control board 12 side, as the customer waiting demo effect, for example, a telop display effect It is possible to perform demo movie production. The telop display effect is an effect of displaying a telop display area in the lower right and upper left areas of the image display device 5, and scrolling and displaying text information such as "relief time reduction installed" and information explaining the relief time reduction in the telop display area. be. Further, the demo movie effect is an effect of reproducing and displaying a predetermined moving image (demo movie) on the entire surface of the image display device 5. In addition, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect may be overlapped, and in that case, the display of the telop display area is displayed on the front side of the demo movie. With regard to the telop display effect, whether or not to execute the telop display effect is determined by lottery, and the telop display effect may be configured to be executed at a higher rate when the set value has a higher degree of advantage. As a result, the player can predict the set value based on the execution frequency of the telop display effect. Further, the telop display effect may be configured to be executed at a higher rate as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, as the presence or absence of execution is determined by lottery. As a result, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened based on the execution frequency of the telop display effect. Further, the telop display effect is determined by lottery to be one of a plurality of effect modes, and the ratio of which effect mode is determined depends on the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. You may be. Thereby, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened depending on the production mode of the telop display effect.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / low base background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / low base state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / high base background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / high base state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / high base background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / high base state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / low base background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / low base state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

The command E2XX (H) is an effect control command (a command for specifying the number of consecutive big hits) that specifies the number of consecutive big hits (how many big hits have occurred during the probability change state). The number of consecutive big hits is set in "XX". For example, when the third big hit occurs during the probability change state, the command E203 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of consecutive big hits.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-11 and 9-12, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 116 IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Control is performed so that a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set and a recovery relief time reduction specification command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 116IWS11). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9701 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9708 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time is shortened. The number of fluctuations is notified. In addition, the relief time can be shortened by executing the variable display based on the hold memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the hold memory stored before the power failure). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player when a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold memory corresponding to the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is stored before the power failure.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 116IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if a big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the shortened state. Will be. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such a mode. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the high base flag indicating that the time is shortened, the high base count counter for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state, and the hold storage are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state where the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day is continued, so that the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, it is possible to prevent the relief time reduction counter from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is not initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
9-14 to 9-16 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature portion 116IW. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the first random number buffer area of (step 061IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 061IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / low base state, and the low probability / low base background specification command is executed. In some cases, it is determined that it is in the low probability / high base state, and the low probability / high base background specification command is executed. Judge and issue a high-accuracy / high-base background specification command, and if the probability variation flag is on and the high-base flag is off, determine that it is in a high-probability / low-base state and issue a high-accuracy / low-base background specification command. Send.

Regarding the processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) for transmitting the background designation command according to the current gaming state to the effect control CPU 120, the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later) ), It may be executed after the update process of the relief time reduction counter and the high base count counter and the control process related to the high base flag are performed. That is, when the relief time reduction counter is updated at the start of fluctuation and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled by the establishment of the relief time reduction, the low probability / high base background specification command is immediately transmitted. When the background is changed or the high base count counter is updated and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) ends and the normal state is controlled, the low accuracy / low base background specification command is immediately sent. The background may be changed.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is in the probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, when the process of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later) is executed to be in a probabilistic state (high probability state), the number of relief times after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) is shortened. Do not execute counter update processing. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the probabilistic change state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened does not decrease even if the fluctuation display is executed, and the case is in the non-probability change state (low probability state). Only, when the fluctuation display is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases. Not limited to the configuration of this example, even in the case of a probability change state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be uniformly reduced when the fluctuation display is executed.

When the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Regardless of the case, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated. That is, in this example, the relief time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started and the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started. With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the relief time reduction counter.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data to reduce the relief time. Control is performed to transmit the number 1 designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" in the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of total times of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state of 800 times is reduced. It is controlled to (low probability / high base state). In addition, when the state in which the relief time reduction occurs is a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via a big hit or a time reduction deviation, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 800 times of time reduction is performed again. Be controlled. Therefore, in this example, if the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing or the big hit game is completed, the relief time reduction occurs and the time reduction state is controlled. It will be.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. Is high. Then, in this example, when the relief time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) via the jackpot or the time reduction loss due to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later), the number of time reductions is performed. Is configured to be updated. For example, in the time saving state (high base state) via the jackpot or the time saving loss, when the remaining number of times controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is 50 times, when the relief time saving occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the base state) is updated to 800 times. On the other hand, in this example, when the time reduction occurs in the time reduction state (high base state) including the relief time reduction due to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later, the number of time reductions is updated. It is configured not to be done. For example, in the time saving state (high base state) via the relief time saving, when the remaining number of times controlled in the time saving state (high base state) is 500 times, even if the time saving deviation occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the state) remains 500 times and is not updated. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

Further, in this example, the relief time reduction is established by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B described later). When the loss is derived and displayed, it is configured to be controlled to the time saving state by the relief time saving, which has a higher advantage than the time saving loss. Specifically, when the variation display (out of time reduction) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started, the normal state (low probability / low base state) is changed to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). The transition control is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, even if the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened, the advantage of the time saving state due to the relief time can be secured, and the relief degree of the player can be increased (for example, the player). It is possible to curb the investment amount of.

Further, in this example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 and the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the high base number counter is set to "800", but the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800". Not set. When the relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed after the relief time reduction occurs or when a big hit occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a big hit after the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction does not occur (that is, the relief time reduction is 800 times). It is not controlled continuously in a short time).

Specifically, when the variable display for 800 times of time reduction is executed without a big hit in the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction ends and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is,). No new relief time reduction will occur). Further, even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without a big hit in the shifted normal state, the relief time reduction does not occur. After the relief time reduction occurs, the relief time reduction occurs again. For example, after the relief time reduction occurs, a big hit occurs and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and 800 times after the big hit game ends. If the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed, or after the relief time reduction occurs, the RAM clear processing is executed and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and 800 after the RAM clear processing. This is the case where the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display of times is executed.

Not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" when the relief time reduction occurs, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to 1 each time the variation display is executed in the relief time reduction. By subtracting, a new relief time reduction may be established at the same time as the end of the relief time reduction, and the relief time may be continuously controlled until the next big hit occurs.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter, and the relief time reduction counter is not updated during the relief time reduction, so that a big hit occurs in the relief time reduction. Even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without doing so, it is not controlled in the relief time reduction (that is, it is not continuously controlled in the relief time reduction of 800 times of the relief time reduction), but a big hit occurs after the relief time reduction is completed. If the variable display is executed 800 times without any problem, the relief time may be shortened.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter and "200" is set in the high base number counter, so that a big hit does not occur in the relief time reduction. When the fluctuation display for 200 times of time reduction is executed, the relief time reduction is completed and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is executed, and 600 fluctuation displays are displayed without a big hit in the transitioned normal state. When executed, the relief time may be shortened.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), a value larger than "800" may be set in the high base number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a plurality of types of values corresponding to the number of time reductions may be set in the high base number counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the high base count counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the high base count counter. You may.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process is used as a high base number counter. It may be configured to be set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When determining the number of time reductions by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5609A). By the process of step 061IWS5609A, in the first variation pattern setting process described later, it is possible to specify that the variation display is such that the relief time reduction is established, and to determine the variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS5610A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610A). 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later), in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to light when the relief time reduction is established. That is, in this example, in the low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball launch operation (right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. If the right-handed indicator 26 is already lit, such as when the relief time is shortened in the time saving state, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) may be omitted.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the relief time reduction 1 designation command is used. The command 957F (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is the number of times in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, Or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 2 Control is performed to transmit the designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the command 9608 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction, and sends a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction to suggest that the relief time reduction is established, or an effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction (for example, a fanning effect described later). And countdown effect) may be executed.

Further, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which the relief time reduction can be continuously generated, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command are transmitted only when the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. When the relief time is shortened after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command may not be transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, it is controlled to one of low probability / low base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / high base state, and high probability / low base state. It is controlled to either the / high base state or the high probability / high base state. However, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), the high probability / high base state (second probability change state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, which will be described later). (See S2274), the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base number counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base number counter is not "0", it is controlled to the low probability / high base state.

In the first embodiment, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R big hit A. / When controlled to a high base state, when controlled to a low probability / high base state via a time saving gap, and when controlled to a low probability / high base state via a relief time saving. In this example, when controlled to the low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are performed a predetermined number of times in total (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times). (See Fig. 9-6) Based on the execution, the low probability / high base state is terminated and the normal state (low probability / low base state) is entered.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 061IWS5618A). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter does not reach "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether it is done.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is in effect (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, if Y is determined in step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later), the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times) in total. Times. See FIG. 9-6) It is determined that the execution has been performed, and the processing of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed to end the low probability / high base state and end the normal state (low probability / low base state). Will be migrated to.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state until the fluctuation display ends.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A without performing the processing after step 061IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the device is not limited to the above method. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 061IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 061IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 061IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a hit determination random number without performing the processes of steps 061IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game is configured to be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. Specifically, when 6R jackpot A occurs in the normal state (low base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and the time saving state ( When 6R jackpot A occurs during (high base state) and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 200 times of time saving. With such a configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is performed by the relief time reduction counter of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and steps 061IWS5602B to S5608B). It is configured to be executed after the update process and the high base flag setting process.

Therefore, in this example, when the display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is a big hit, the advantage of the time reduction state controlled after the end of the big hit game is determined assuming that the big hit occurs in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. NS. Specifically, when the display result of the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is 6R jackpot A, assuming that 6R jackpot A occurs in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction, the time reduction state is changed to 200 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is controlled (the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS2284 and S2286 to S2287 described later). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player by shortening the relief time (for example, suppressing the investment amount of the player).

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63A). ), The process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

If the big hit is not made in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS65A). Step 061IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. As for the small hit type, a plurality of types may be provided so that the opening pattern (that is, the ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening) is different, or only one may be provided. .. When there is only one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Further, when the small hit is not made in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS69A). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if the probability change state (high probability state) is set), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, when the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later) is executed and the probability change state (high probability state) is executed, the time saving determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is performed. It is decided to leave it as it is without shortening the time without doing.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, in the low probability state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving is lost. A lottery process is performed based on a random number for use, and it is determined whether or not the time reduction is lost (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is decided that the time reduction is lost with a probability of about 1/400 (see FIG. 9-4). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In this example, when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state), the number of time reductions is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later), which is substantially invalid. The time saving is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, in the time saving state (high base state), the time saving of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is not executed and the time saving is determined as it is. It may be configured to be determined in.

Further, for example, among the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving, in the case of the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving deviation of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is determined. In the case of the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss, the time saving determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may be executed without executing the process. That is, the time saving loss does not occur in the case of the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the time saving loss may occur in the case of the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss.

In addition, when a plurality of types of time reduction deviations are provided so as to have different advantages (for example, the number of time reductions), for example, it corresponds to a value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area. Determine the type as the type that is out of time. Further, in this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the type determination random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Further, in this case, in addition to the large hit type determination and the small hit type determination, the time saving type determination may be configured to perform the determination process using a common type determination random number.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is decided to be the 6R jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is decided to be the 6R jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "3". If it is decided to use 6R jackpot C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is decided to use 6R jackpot D, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "7". If it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be out of time, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "2". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the relief variation flag is set, that is, when the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief variation flag (step 061IWS17092A) to determine the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table E for the first special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is selected (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

If the relief variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the probability variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the low probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A). The first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability / low base state shown in (Step 061IWS1712A) is selected. If the high base flag is set (that is, low probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 9-8 (D) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) Is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability / high base state (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). The first special symbol variation pattern table B for the high probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (that is, in the high probability / high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C). The first special symbol variation pattern table C for the high probability / high base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 has a variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, S1716A, and a variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8 should be used (step 061IWS1717A).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 061IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 061IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707A).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the variation pattern table for the first special symbol is executed. B is selected and the variation display of the long variation is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation display of the variation time is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern table E for the first special symbol is selected, and the variation display dedicated to the relief time reduction is executed.

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1122A). Step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 061IWS1125A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 is sent to the effect control CPU 120. 1 Control is performed to send a compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this feature portion 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In such a case, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a big hit or a small hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, when the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the stop symbol of the variable display that shortens the relief time, the control of transmitting the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is not performed. Further, even when the stop symbol of the variation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the control of transmitting the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is not performed (steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, which will be described later). See S1129B). That is, in this example, even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the one Do not forcibly stop the variable display of the special symbol of.

In this example, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit, or it is a big hit. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type having a high advantage (for example, 6R jackpot B), the variation display of the first special symbol may not be forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol variation process may be terminated as it is. .. In this case, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126) based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the small hit game. Move to. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 061IWS1120A, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a big hit with a high advantage, is being executed, the first is during the small hit game. The update of the fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
9-19 and 9-20 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 061IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B, the time saving state (100th time, 200th time, or 800th time; see FIG. 9-6) is started. By ending the low probability / high base state and shifting to the normal state (low probability / low base state) and executing the processes of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B, the predetermined times (100th time, 200th time) The right-handed display 26 is turned off at the end of the variation display of the 8th or 800th time (see FIG. 9-6).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 061IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot starts (step 061IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step 061IWS2030A). It should be noted that whether or not the case is determined to be out of time can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is decided to set the time reduction, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). Then, when the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability / high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

When the high base flag is not set (in this example, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the time reduction does not occur, so in the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 103 performs the time reduction. The high base flag is set based on the occurrence of the loss (step 061IWS2032A). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, when a time reduction deviation occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state) due to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later), the time reduction state (low probability / high) of 100 times of time reduction occurs. When the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled and the time reduction occurs, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is continued and the time reduction count (that is, the value of the high base count counter) is changed. Not updated.

In this example, the number of time reductions is not updated when the time reduction occurs during the time reduction state (high base state) including the relief time reduction due to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later). It is configured. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

In this example, the number of time reductions (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is not updated when the time reduction occurs in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state). Not limited to, for example, when a time saving loss occurs (or a time saving state) in a time saving state (low probability / high base state) via a jackpot or a time saving loss among the time saving states (low probability / high base state). When the remaining number of times is less than 100 times due to the time reduction loss), the time reduction number (that is, the value of the high base number counter) is updated and again controlled to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 100 times. It may be done.

In step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), a plurality of types of values corresponding to the number of time reductions may be set in the high base number counter. For example, when the time reduction is missed the first time, "100" is set in the high base count counter, and when the time reduction is missed the second time, "200" is set in the high base count counter. You may.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process is used as a high base number counter. It may be configured to be set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 90% and 200 times with a probability of 10%. When determining the number of time reductions by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described later), in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to light when the time reduction occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036A).

In this example, when the time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not set to "800" (that is, the remaining number of times until the relief time is not reset), but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, set the value of the relief time reduction counter to "800" (that is, reset the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction) even when the time reduction occurs, such as when a big hit occurs or a relief time reduction occurs. May be good.

As shown in FIGS. 9-19 to 9-20, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, and when the time reduction is lost, the player is on the right side of the game area. It is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a gate notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may.

In addition, right-handed notification and gate notification are not executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, and right-handed notification and gate notification are executed when a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening in that state. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol is not immediately started, and the first holding memory is set). You may.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is, when there is a possibility that the right-handed operation is performed), the recognition degree It may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch a game ball to the left of the game area in a mode in which the probability is low (for example, a low-volume sound output or a small screen display). .. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (or the special winning opening provided on the right side of the game area) is detected in the normal state (low probability / low base state) (that is, the right-handed operation is intended). If it is presumed that this is done in a specific manner), the left-handed notification may be performed in a mode with a high degree of recognition (for example, a loud sound output or a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls on the right side of the game area such as the passing gate 41 or the second start winning opening reaches a certain number. Further, the passing gate 41 provides a left-handed notification when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and is provided on the right side of the second start winning opening (or the game area). The special winning opening) may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a specific number (for example, one) or more of game balls, which is less than a predetermined number, is detected.

In the feature unit 116IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passing gate 41 or the second start winning opening (or the game area) is displayed. When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening provided on the right side is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
9-21 to 9-23 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature portion 116IW. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 061IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step 061IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 061IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is in the probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

When the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data to reduce the relief time. Control is performed to transmit the number 1 designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" in the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the total number of variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS5610B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610B). 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and the relief time reduction 1 designation command is used. The command 957F (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, Or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615B). If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 2 Control is performed to transmit the designated command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 061IWS5618B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter does not reach "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is in effect (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B without performing the processing after step 061IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the device is not limited to the above method. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 061IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 061IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

If the big hit is not made in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS65B). Step 061IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 061IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 061IWS68B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. As for the small hit type, a plurality of types may be provided so that the opening pattern (that is, the ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning opening) is different, or only one may be provided. .. When there is only one small hit type, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Further, when the small hit is not made in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS69B). If the probability change flag is set, that is, if it is in the probability change state (high probability state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, when the process of step 061IWS69B is executed, in the case of a probability change state (high probability state), the time reduction of step 061IWS70B is not determined and the time reduction is determined as it is. It is determined.

If the probability variation flag is not set, that is, in a low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving is lost, and a random number for determining the time saving is lost. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is decided that the time reduction is lost with a probability of about 1/400 (see FIG. 9-4). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is decided to be the 6R jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is decided to be the 6R jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "3". If it is decided to use 6R jackpot C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "5", and if it is decided to use 6R jackpot D, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "7". If it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be out of time, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "2". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

When the relief variation flag is set, that is, when the variation display satisfies the relief time reduction, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief variation flag (step 061IWS17092B) to determine the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table C for the second special symbol for when the relief time reduction is established shown in FIG. 9-9 (C) is selected (step 061IWS17093B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the relief variation flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the high probability / low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A). The second special symbol variation pattern table A for the high probability / low base state shown in is selected (step 061IWS1712B). When the probability variation flag is not set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or when the high base flag is set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the second special symbol variation pattern table B for times other than the high probability / low base state shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) is selected (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in 9-9 is to be used (step 061IWS1717B).

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the second special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 061IWS1705B), and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707B).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol is executed. A is selected and the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation time is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a state other than the high probability / low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the variation display of the long variation is executed. Further, in the case of the variation display of the second special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern table C for the second special symbol is selected, and the variation display dedicated to the relief time reduction is executed.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). ..

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1122B). Step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 061IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS11256), The CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this feature portion 116IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a large hit or a small hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 061IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, if the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, it is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit and a high advantage is a big hit. In the case of the type (for example, 6R jackpot C), the variation display of the second special symbol may not be forcibly stopped, and the second special symbol variation process may be terminated as it is. In this case, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126) based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the small hit game. Move to. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 061IWS1120B, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss or a small hit, is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player plays a game in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening win a game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In order to launch the game ball (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the area, in principle, the game ball wins a prize at the second start winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the second special symbol Although the fluctuation display is not performed, the player intentionally displays the fluctuation of the second special symbol, which has a higher advantage than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol even if the player mistakenly launches the ball (or even if a long fluctuation is executed). (Aiming) It is possible that the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display not intended by the player, or the player may intentionally aim at the second start winning opening.

Therefore, in this example, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed. It is configured so that the out-of-order symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol. For example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), even if a player unintentionally wins a prize in the second start winning opening and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol is displayed. If the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation display of is forcibly stopped at the out-of-order symbol. In addition, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the player intentionally performs a firing operation (right-handed) aiming at winning the second start winning opening, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation time is 10 minutes), the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed from the symbol. It will be stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot symbol from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
9-26 and 9-27 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 061IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 061IWS2026B). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is decided to set the time reduction, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). Then, when the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability / high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

When the high base flag is not set (that is, in the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the time saving deviation (step). 061IWS2032B). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the high base number counter (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2037B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 061IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 061IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 061IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 061IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 061IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 061IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (Y in step 061IWS2501), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS2510). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a probability change storage flag indicating that the game state immediately before the start of the big hit (the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is the probability change state (high probability state) ( Step 061IWS2511). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2512). If the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a high base storage flag indicating that the game state immediately before the start of the big hit (the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is the high base state (step 061IWS2513). ).

By executing the process of steps 061IWS251 to S2513, in this example, the game state immediately before the start of the big hit (the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is the probability change state (high probability state) or the high base state. Is recorded.

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the high base flag, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 (step 061IWS2514).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value of the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 061IWS2515).

In this example, when the process of step 061IWS2515A is executed and a big hit occurs, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter when the detection signal is input from the gate switch 21 to make the initial setting. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, at the start or end of the big hit fanfare period, or during the round of the big hit game, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "800", and at the start or end of the ending period of the big hit game, the relief time reduction counter may be set. It may be configured so that "800" is set and the initial setting is made.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 061IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 061IWS2504).

In this feature unit 116IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 9-30 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 061IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 061IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 061IW106 is in the ON state (step 061IWS2404). If the V area switch 061IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 061IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 061IW104. (Step 061IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 061IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 061IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 061IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 061IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 061IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the large winning door. It is stopped and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 061IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 061IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 061IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
9-31 to 9-32 are flowcharts showing the jackpot end processing (step S125) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 061IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 061IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 061IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 061IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 061IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 061IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 061IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 061IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 061IWS2205), sets the probability variation flag, and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 061IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is 6R jackpot B (step 061IWS2240). Whether or not it is a 6R jackpot B can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 061IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 061IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R jackpot B, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2290. In the case of 6R jackpot B, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it is controlled to a high probability / low base state (first probability variation state). Will be done.

If it is not the 6R jackpot B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is the 6R jackpot C (step 061IWS2253). Whether or not it is a 6R jackpot C can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 061IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 061IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R jackpot C, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step 061IWS2258). If the probability change storage flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2260. If the probability variation storage flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 061IWS2259). If the high base storage flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2290.

If the probabilistic storage flag was not set in step 061IWS2258 (N in step 061IWS2258), or if the high base storage flag was set in step 061IWS2259 (Y in step 061IWS2259), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag. Set and shift to the high base state (step 061IWS2260). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2290.

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS2258 to S2260, in this example, in the case of 6R jackpot C, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the gaming state immediately before the start of the jackpot (big hit). When the game state at the time of the stop display of the symbol) is the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), it is controlled again to the high probability / low base state (first probability change state). On the other hand, when the game state immediately before the start of the big hit (the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is a game state other than the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the high probability / high base state ( It will be controlled to the second probability change state).

If it is not 6R jackpot C, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS2269). Whether or not it is a 6R jackpot D can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 061IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 061IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R jackpot D, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2274). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2290. Therefore, in the case of 6R jackpot D, the high base flag is set, and if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state). It will be.

If it is not the 6R jackpot D (that is, if it is the 6R jackpot A), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 061IWS2284).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 061IWS2286). Then, if the high base storage flag is set, "200" is set in the high base count counter (step 061IWS2287), and if the high base storage flag is not set, "100" is set in the high base count counter. (Step 061IWS2288). After that, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2290.

By the processing of steps 061IWS2286 to S2288, in this example, when 6R jackpot A occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and 6R jackpot in the high base state. When A occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 200 times.

In step 061IWS2290, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag if set (step 061IWS2290). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 061IWS2291).

(External output signal)
FIG. 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process of outputting a signal as shown in FIGS. 9-33 to an external device such as a hall management computer is performed. As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, the external output signals include a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a fluctuation stop signal, a security signal, a door opening signal, a prize ball signal, and The out ball signal is output. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and the high base state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period that is out of time. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are output externally at the start of the variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol determination period. The security signal is a signal that is output externally when an error is detected. The door opening signal is a signal output externally when the door opening is detected. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 prize balls are issued. The out-ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 out-balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of big hits can be measured by one big hit signal, the number of consecutive villas can be measured by one big hit signal and two big hit signals, and high base control via a time saving loss by three big hit signals. The number of times can be measured, and the number of high-base control times via the relief time reduction can be measured by four jackpot signals.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game shifts to the high base state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed because the time-saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed in the high-base state. In that case, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the symbol determination period. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the state may shift to the high base state. Therefore, when the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal starts at the start of the fluctuation display. Will be done. For example, in the case of shifting to the high base state when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the signal is output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, and the time saving is shortened. It may be possible to externally identify that the time saving state has been started when the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed. Further, for example, the jackpot 2 signal is externally output during the jackpot game and during the high probability / high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are at the start of the low probability / high base state (or low probability / high base). The high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state may be externally distinguishable by being output to the outside (during the state).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened, and the variation is made at the start of the symbol confirmation period in response to the end of the variation display. A stop signal is output externally. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to the high base state based on the shortened relief time to the outside at an appropriate timing. Further, when the jackpot 4 signal and the fluctuation stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omission outside. In addition, the number of times the relief time has been shortened can be specified externally by outputting four jackpot signals. In this way, in an external device such as a hall management computer, the trigger, timing, and number of times controlled to a high base state can be specified. Therefore, for example, the relief time reduction arrival rate and the number of relief times in actual operation have been reached. It is possible to analyze the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming store, such as what kind of customer base the player is.

In this example, when the variable display that shortens the relief time is started, the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state). For example, the relief time is shortened. When the variable display that becomes The external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state).

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output even during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signals may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably discriminate the type of time reduction even in the high base state.

(Transition of game state)
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. FIG. 9-34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, whereas the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is long. It is executed with fluctuation. Further, since the base state is low, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened is low. Therefore, in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the left side of the game area and launches the game ball (left). Hit). Therefore, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the starting prize is mainly generated in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning opening, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B is mainly generated.

As shown in FIG. 9-34, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability / low base state, the game shifts to a low probability / high base state after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). ), The low probability / high base state is maintained until the end of the variation display (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-34, even if the symbol is out of order in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state is obtained when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. (See steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit), It is controlled to a low probability / high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B).

When shifting to the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. NS. Further, since the base state is low, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened is low. Therefore, in order to make the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball (right). Hit). Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the starting prize is mainly generated in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning opening, and the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state, a 6R big hit C or a 6R big hit D is mainly generated.

As shown in FIG. 9-34, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in a high probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high again after the jackpot game ends. / The low base state (first probability variation state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot D occurs in a high probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and has a high probability until the next jackpot occurs. / The high base state (second probability variation state) is maintained (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274).

When shifting to the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, while the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variation. NS. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball ( Right-handed). Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the start winning is mainly generated in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B is mainly generated.

As shown in FIG. 9-34, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a high probability / high base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / after the end of the jackpot game It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a high probability / high base state, the game shifts to a low probability / high base state after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example). ), The low probability / high base state is maintained until the end of the variation display (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286, S2288).

When shifting to the low probability / high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long fluctuation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently opened. Therefore, in order to make the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening win the game ball and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball ( Right-handed). Therefore, in the low probability / high base state, the start winning is mainly generated in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / high base state, a 6R big hit A or a 6R big hit B is mainly generated.

As shown in FIG. 9-34, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability / high base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / after the end of the jackpot game It shifts to the low base state (first probability variation state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Further, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in the low probability / high base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state again after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs or the predetermined number of times (200 in this example). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the variation display of (times) is completed (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286 and S2288).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-34, in the low probability / high base state, when the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or the big hit game, the next big hit does not occur and the number of fluctuations is 800 times. (When) is reached, the time is controlled again to a low probability / high base state of 800 times (see steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5607B to S5608B).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-34, in the low probability / high base state, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability / high base state And shift to the low probability / low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the time saving deviation, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, it is low. It ends the probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the jackpot generated in the low base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. , Ends the low probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B). In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the jackpot generated in the high base state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed 200 times in total. , Ends the low probability / high base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state is controlled via the relief time reduction, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed 800 times in total, the low probability / high It ends the base state and shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-34, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability change state), the 6R jackpot C is obtained and the high probability / low base state (first probability change state) is controlled again. Or, it becomes 6R jackpot D and is controlled to a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), so even if a jackpot occurs, it will be in the probability variation state again with a 100% probability. Therefore, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), it can be said that the occurrence of at least two more big hits is guaranteed during the probability variation state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), if the 6R jackpot B is reached, the probability variation state is controlled to the high probability / low base state and the probability variation state continues, but if the 6R jackpot A is reached, the probability is low. It shifts to the probability / high base state and the probability change state ends. Therefore, in the high probability / high base state (second probability change state), it can be said that only one big hit is guaranteed to occur during the probability change state (one loop).

In this example, the case where 6R jackpots A to D, which are jackpots of all 6 rounds, are provided as the jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, the case where the 6R jackpot A is controlled to the low probability / high base state is shown, but even when the same low probability / high base state is controlled, the number of rounds is shown. 4R jackpot A, which is a 4-round jackpot, or 10R jackpot A, which is a 10-round jackpot, may be provided. Similarly, for example, even when controlled to the same high probability / high base state, a 4R jackpot D for a 4-round jackpot or a 10R jackpot D for a 10-round jackpot may be provided. Often, various aspects are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 and 9-33, in this example, the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (first state). (2 Probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, while the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variation. In other words, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, in this example, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is the second special. It is a state in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the symbol is high (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the first shortened state). In this example, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the low probability / high base state, and the high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), which are the first shortened states, the first special symbol is used. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the first shortened state, the ratio of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least the second shortened state described later. It may be configured to be higher than.

Further, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed with a long variation, while the variation display of the second special symbol is a normal variation. Runs in time. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (or is executed at a higher rate) in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the first special symbol. Therefore, in this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), the ratio of the variation display of the second special symbol to the variation display of the shorter fluctuation time than the variation display of the first special symbol is high ( Hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as a second shortened state). In this example, in the high probability / low base state (first probability variation state), which is the second shortened state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display of the first special symbol. The ratio is 100%, but the composition is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the second shortened state, the ratio of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least than the first shortened state. It may be configured to be high.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is mainly executed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and in the second shortened state, the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In response to the variation display, the image display device 5 executes the variation display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The variable display of one of the special symbols is not forcibly stopped. In such a configuration, for example, in the normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( When controlled to the high base state), the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped. Here, as control for shortening the relief time (high base state), control for increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol, control for shortening the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening). In addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When the control related to the special symbol (controlling to the second shortened state with a high ratio) is performed, the fluctuation time is shortened until the variation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, the variation time is 10 minutes) is completed. The variation display of the second special symbol that has been performed (that is, the variation efficiency has been improved) cannot be executed, and the benefit of the shortened relief time cannot be obtained. In such a state, even if the relief time is controlled to be shortened, the progress of the game is significantly delayed and the interest is reduced.

Therefore, in this example, when the relief time reduction is established, as the control of the relief time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control for shortening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is performed (that is, the first special symbol is controlled). Control related to the special symbol, that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is controlled to the first shortened state (in this example, the low probability / high base state) in which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time is shorter than that of the second special symbol. Is configured to be done. With such a configuration, when the relief time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability / high base state), so even if the fluctuation display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed is continued. , The fluctuation display of the first special symbol whose fluctuation time is shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency is improved) can be executed, and the benefit of the relief time reduction can be obtained. In addition, the game can proceed smoothly when the relief time is controlled to be shortened, and the interest can be improved.

The fluctuation display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed continues even after the transition to the relief time reduction (high base state) of the first shortened state, but the fluctuation time is shortened. When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of, the player is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B).

(Example of game state control)
Next, an example of controlling the gaming state will be described. FIG. 9-35 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the first embodiment.

Of FIGS. 9-35, in FIG. 9-35 (A), in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol, which is out of time, is started, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. An example of controlling the gaming state when the variation display (disengagement (no time reduction)) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started during the execution of the variation display is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability / low base state) is changed to the time reduction state (low). Control to shift to the probability / high base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), the misaligned symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time is shortened (T2 timing), but at this time, the second special symbol being executed is displayed. The out-of-order symbol is not forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), after the relief time reduction is established and the state is shifted to the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) via the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction is established for the first special symbol. The time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started before the fluctuation display (T3 timing), but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). ). That is, the time saving state due to the relief time saving, which has a higher number of times of time saving than the time saving loss and has a high advantage, is maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol for which the relief time reduction is established is off (no time reduction), but the variation of the first special symbol for which the relief time reduction is established. Even if the display result of the display is out of time, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the variation display (time reduction loss) of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is started (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability / high) is changed from the normal state (low probability / low base state). Control to shift to the base state) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established (T1 timing), but at this time, the time reduction number is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). That is, the time saving state due to the relief time saving, which has a higher number of times of time saving than the time saving loss and has a high advantage, is maintained.

Of FIGS. 9-35, FIG. 9-35 (B) shows a control example of the gaming state when the time saving state due to the relief time saving ends at the start of the variation display which is the time saving deviation.

As shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving, the update processing of the high base number counter is executed at the start of the fluctuation display that is out of the time saving, and the value is 0. At (t1 timing), control is performed to end the relief time reduction and shift to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), when the time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (t2 timing), the time reduction state due to the time reduction deviation from the normal state (low probability / high base state). ) Is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

Next, control examples of the gaming state in the modified examples 1-1 and the modified examples 1-2 of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-36 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the modified example 1-1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 9-37 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the modified example 1-2 of the first embodiment. The configurations of the modified examples 1-1 and the modified examples 1-2 can also be applied to the configurations of the second embodiment described later.

(Modification 1-1)
In this example, the relief time reduction counter and the high base count counter are updated at the start of fluctuations in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. FIG. 9-36 (A) In the modification 1-1 shown in FIG. 9-36 (B), the relief time reduction counter is configured to be updated at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. In Example 1-1, it is assumed that the high base number counter is updated at the end of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

Of FIGS. 9-36, in FIG. 9-36 (A), in the normal state (low probability / low base state), after the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed. An example of controlling the game state when the variation display of is completed and the relief time reduction is established is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-36 (A), during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, which is out of time, the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time is established is started at the end of the variation display (T1). timing). Then, if the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol before the variation display of the first special symbol is completed (T2 timing), the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the time saving deviation is entered. Be controlled.

After that, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the relief time reduction counter is updated and the relief time reduction is established (T3 timing), the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction is controlled again. At this time, the number of time reductions is updated to 800 times.

Of FIGS. 9-36, FIG. 9-36 (B) shows when the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving. An example of controlling the game state when the relief time reduction ends is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-36 (B), in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving, when the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol (t2 timing), this time point. Since the high base count counter has not been updated and the relief time reduction continues, the time reduction deviation is invalidated.

Then, in the modified example 1-1 shown in FIG. 9-36 (B), since the high base number counter is updated after the derivation display of the time reduction deviation, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time reduction is started here. Control to shift to the normal state (low probability / low base state) will be performed (t2 timing).

(Modification 1-2)
Next, a control example of the gaming state in the case where the time saving state is reached via the big hit (without forced stop) before the derivation display of the time saving deviation will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37.

In this example, during the execution of the variation display of one of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display of the other special symbol. In this case, the variable display of one special symbol is forcibly stopped at the out-of-order symbol, but in the modified example 1-2 shown in FIGS. 9-37, in such a case, one special symbol is used. It is assumed that the fluctuation display of is configured so that it is not forcibly stopped by the out-of-order symbol.

In FIG. 9-37 (A), in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol, which is out of time, is started, and during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, An example of controlling the game state when the big hit game is started and the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes the big hit are shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-36 (A), the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a big hit, is started during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, which is out of time (T1 timing). Since the variation display of the second special symbol in the low probability / low base state is executed with a long variation (for example, the variation time is 10 minutes), the variation display of the second special symbol is started later by the end of the variation display. 1 The jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the variable display of the special symbol (T2 timing), and the jackpot game can also be executed.

Here, assuming that the 6R jackpot A occurs and the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), at the end of the jackpot game (T3 timing), the time is shortened (low probability). / High base state) (for example, corresponding to the process of step 061IWS2284).

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-36 (A), the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol that was started before the variation display of the first special symbol that became a big hit ( (T4 timing), at this time, the number of time reductions is not updated due to the time reduction deviation (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B).

(Variable display start setting process)
9-38 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 100IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 100IWS802, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has three decorative symbols having the same even-numbered symbols as stop symbols. (Normally a big hit symbol) is determined. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot B to D, the effect control CPU 120 uses a combination of decorative symbols (probability variation jackpot symbols) in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. ) Is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) of "135" as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of the decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including the special symbol (for example, the star symbol) is determined. When a plurality of time-saving missed types are provided, a combination of decorative symbols of the missed symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) may be determined according to the time-saving missed type.

However, in this example, even if the time reduction occurs in the high base state, it is practically invalid. Therefore, when the received display result specification command indicates "time reduction" in the high base state. However, it is not a combination of decorative symbols of out-of-order symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol), but a combination of decorative symbols in the case of "out-of-order". In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, even if the time reduction deviation occurs in the high base state, the special symbol corresponding to the time reduction deviation is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot is called the probabilistic jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

In this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit. It is configured to run at a high rate. Therefore, it is suggested that the high expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). It is configured so that the rate of executing the advance notice effect is lower when the display result is out of alignment than the period (the period during which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the notice effect is executed in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) but it is not a big hit. Can be done. As for the look-ahead notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). It may be configured so that the rate of executing the look-ahead notice effect is lower when the display result is out of alignment than the period (the period during which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10).

Further, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), an effect suggesting that the relief time is shortened (for example, a countdown effect) can be executed. In this case, by limiting the execution of the timer effect as the advance notice effect at this time, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counters, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

Further, in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the red effect mode (for example, the red effect image is displayed) and the blue effect mode (for example, the blue effect image is displayed). In the case of a big hit, the rate of executing the advance notice effect is higher in the case of the red effect than in the case of the loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). When the display result is out of alignment, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is lower than that in the period when the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10). With such a configuration, the interest when the notice effect is executed in the red effect mode in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is not a big hit. Can be suppressed. As for the look-ahead notice effect, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is the period before the predetermined period (in this example, relief). When the display result is out of alignment, the ratio of executing the look-ahead advance notice effect in a mode with a high degree of expectation may be lower than the period (the period during which the remaining number of times until the time reduction exceeds 10).

If multiple types of advance notice effects (and look-ahead advance notice effects) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the types of advance notice effects (and look-ahead advance notice effects) with high jackpot expectations will be reduced in relief time. In this example, the execution may be restricted during a predetermined period (in this example, a period in which the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation level is classified into five stages, the execution may be restricted only to the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead notice effect) of the type in which the jackpot expectation level is the fourth stage or higher. Further, for example, when the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) suggesting that the time reduction is out of order is configured to be executable, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining time until the relief time reduction) is enabled. In the period (the number of times is 10 or less), the execution of the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) suggesting that the time reduction is lost may be restricted.

Further, for example, even if the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, when the variable display that is a big hit or the time reduction is executed, the execution of the advance notice effect (and the look-ahead advance notice effect) is not restricted. May be good.

Further, in the time saving state due to the relief time saving, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect or the notice effect may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of Is a value larger than the number of times remaining until the relief time reduction, that is, the hold memory stored before reaching the fluctuation of the relief time reduction, and the line is controlled after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. It may be configured to limit (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation. Thereby, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that straddles before and after the control of the relief time reduction is restricted. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect in the production. Even if the number of reserved memories is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, the time is shortened (for example, via a jackpot). In the case of the time saving state or the time saving state via the time saving deviation), it may be possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect for the reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 is determined by checking, for example, whether or not the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player at an appropriate timing by the time saving rush effect that the relief time is controlled to be shortened, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush rush effect that notifies that the display result will be a big hit after executing an effect in the same mode as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be given a surprise. You can improve your interest.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the time reduction rushing pretending effect is executed using the dedicated fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern #M). , Not limited to such a mode, for example, a full rotation effect (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative symbols are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, is executed. It may be. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for big hits as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time is specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is out of order when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, a dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction deviation is used. A fluctuation pattern for deviation similar to the usual one may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be shared between when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached and before it is reached, and the data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the next variable display is started, the image display device 5 switches to the background image according to the time saving state (see steps 061IWS56A and S56B), so that the change in the background image is relieved. It is possible to notify that the time reduction state is controlled by the time reduction.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108 IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 is until the relief time is shortened. A process table may be selected that includes a fanning effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, an effect that suggests the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened). Further, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 has a countdown effect (for example, the relief time is shortened) according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Select a process table that includes an effect effect (for example, an effect in which the effect image changes according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened). It may be.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. FIG. 9-39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state in the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 9-39, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-39, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (A), when the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is stopped and then the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is started, As shown in FIG. 9-39 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is started. .. At this time, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing the right-handed person is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, when the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (C), an image display (for example,) notifying that the blackout state is eliminated and the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is started. The display of "chance mode entry" shown in FIG. 9-39 (C) and the output of the effect sound are executed.

In the configuration shown in FIGS. 9-39, since the time reduction rush effect is executed when the relief time reduction is started, the notification that the time reduction state is controlled based on the establishment of the relief time reduction is executed at an appropriate timing. It can be done and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 9-39, when the variation display by the variation pattern (for example, the first variation pattern #M) dedicated to the establishment of the relief time reduction is executed, the time reduction rush effect is executed, so that the relief is achieved. It is possible to clearly notify the player by the time saving rush effect that the time saving state is controlled based on the establishment of the time saving.

Further, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 9-39, when the time saving rush effect is executed (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started), the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is displayed, so that it is appropriate. Right-handed notification can be executed.

When the time saving state including the relief time saving ends and the state shifts to the normal state, the left-handed instruction display for instructing the left-handed person may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving rushing effect, notifications that are generally performed during the first ending period, such as warnings for forgetting to remove the prepaid card and warnings for preventing immersiveness, may be given, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. May be displayed. In this case, the notification and the logo display in the time-saving rush effect may be performed in the same manner as the notification and the logo display in the ending period of the first hit, or may be performed in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications and logo displays may not be performed in the time saving rush effect, but may be performed in the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time saving state due to the relief time saving.

Further, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, and when the time reduction rushing appearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (B), it is common with the time reduction rushing effect. In the aspect, a blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is started, and the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 that instructs right-handed is displayed. NS. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIGS. 9-39 (C), the blackout state is eliminated and the effect of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol (for example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is executed. After that, it shifts to the big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

In addition, a character game that controls the configuration of the feature unit 116IW to a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the character during the small hit game is also executed. When applied to a game machine that is configured to be possible, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the relief time is a small hit, after executing the time saving rush pretending effect, it is notified that it will be a small hit. May be good.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of the modification 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established, the time reduction rush effect is configured to notify that the control of the time reduction state (relief time reduction) is started, but the start of the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. Since the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is sometimes started, the time saving rush effect may be executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time saving is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special symbol normal processing and the second special symbol normal processing, when the value of the relief time reduction counter after updating is "1", immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is established. Immediately before the relief display, which indicates that the relief time is short, is set, and if the relief flag is set in the first fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the relief time reduction is established. It is determined to be a dedicated fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern # M and the first fluctuation pattern # N) used only for the fluctuation display of. Then, in the variable display start setting process, when the remaining number of times of the relief time reduction is 1, the process table including the time reduction rush effect is selected. By such a process, the time saving rush effect can be executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established.

FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode up to the transition to the time saving state in the modified examples 1-3 of the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 9-40, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modified examples 1-3 shown in FIGS. 9-40, the time saving rush effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (A), after the fluctuation display two times before the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. It will be started. However, at this point in time, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is not displayed because the time saving state has not been entered.

Then, when the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (C), an image display (for example,) notifying that the blackout state is eliminated and the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is started. The display of "chance mode entry" shown in FIG. 9-40 (C) and the output of the effect sound are executed. Even at this point, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is not displayed because the time saving state has not been entered.

After that, when the variable display that shortens the relief time is started, the control of the time saving state is started, so that the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing the right-handed person is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-40 (D).

In the configuration of the modification 1-3 shown in FIG. 9-40, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the relief time reduction is started, so that the player prepares for the right-handed operation in preparation for the start of the relief time reduction. Can be done. In this respect as well, it is possible to notify at an appropriate timing that the time reduction state is controlled based on the establishment of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, when the time saving rush effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, in the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern used in other variation displays (that is, only when the relief time reduction is established). The variation display is performed using a variation pattern that is not. With such a configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced. For the fluctuation display that executes the time saving rush effect (the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that satisfies the relief time reduction), the fluctuation pattern that is also used in other fluctuation displays (that is, the fluctuation pattern that is not exclusively for the relief time reduction establishment) is used. The variable display may be executed.

Further, in the configuration of the modification 1-3 shown in FIG. 9-40, the time saving rush effect is executed immediately before the relief time saving is started, but the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started to display the variation in which the relief time saving is established. Since it is displayed at the time (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started), the right-handed notification can be appropriately executed.

In the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, when the display result is a big hit, the time reduction rushing pretending effect may be executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

In addition, when the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, or when the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established is executed, the configuration that enables the time reduction rush effect and the time reduction rush appearance effect can be executed. , Not limited to the gaming machine having the configuration shown in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, for example, a high probability / low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits frequently occur as shown in the second embodiment. It can also be applied to gaming machines having other configurations, such as gaming machines provided with.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. In the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has the board surface configuration shown in FIG. 1, and the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 is described as shown in FIG. 9-2. The board configuration of the first embodiment as shown in -1 may be used.

The gaming state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the gaming state includes a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state). KT state: Normal state), low probability and 1st KT state (low probability / 1st KT state), high probability and 1st KT state (high probability / 1st KT state) There are cases where it is controlled to a high probability and a second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and even if small hits occur. There are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In the second embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than the big hit and the time saving loss, the small hit is obtained (or the ratio of the small hit is higher than the loss (no time saving)). ) Is configured. That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is either a big hit, a small hit, or a time saving loss, and the display result is not a loss (no time reduction) (or a small hit rather than a loss (no time reduction). The ratio is high). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit is short, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is made to win a game ball. It is structured so that it is extremely difficult (or virtually impossible to win).

(Transition of gaming state in the second embodiment)
The transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW will be described. FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. First, in this feature unit 116IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time, whereas the second special symbol is executed. Since the fluctuation display of is executed with a long fluctuation, the player performs a firing operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit game. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed.

Further, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time saving state via the time saving loss and the relief time saving (in this example, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state)). ) Is controlled. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1, even if the symbol is out of order in the low probability / low base state (normal state), if the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the probability is low / It is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit), It is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the first special symbol is executed. The relief time reduction counter can be updated at the timing at which the variation display of the second special symbol is started and the timing at which the variation display of the second special symbol is started (for example, in steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes the process).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in the second embodiment of this feature 116IW, the first special Since the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed with a long fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed with a normal fluctuation time, so that the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches the game ball. Do (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total, so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. When the 6R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, as shown in FIG. 10-1. It shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second embodiment as well as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened in the low probability / high base state (after the RAM clear processing or after the RAM clear processing). After the big hit game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the occurrence of the next big hit), it is controlled again to the low probability / high base state (first KT state) of 800 times of time reduction (for example). Corresponds to the portion that executes the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). The number of time reductions in the second embodiment is the remaining number of totals of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the low probability / high base state (first KT state). Corresponds to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second embodiment as in the first embodiment, in the low probability / high base state, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. When the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability / high base state is terminated and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed.

For example, when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled via the time saving deviation, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is terminated, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state) (for example, steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A in the first embodiment). It corresponds to the part that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled via the relief time reduction, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed 800 times in total. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is terminated, and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) is performed (for example, steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A in the first embodiment). It corresponds to the part that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it is configured to be controlled to a low probability / high base state with a time reduction of 50 times, but the first embodiment Similarly, the advantage of the time saving state controlled after the big hit game may be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a normal state (low base state), it is controlled to a low probability / high base state with 100 time reductions, and when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a high base state, it is controlled. , The time reduction may be controlled to a low probability / high base state of 200 times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is a big hit, it is assumed that a big hit has occurred in the high base state, and a low probability of 200 times of time reduction after the end of the big hit game. / The high base state may be controlled (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment is performed, and the relief time reduction counters of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B are updated. Corresponds to the part to be executed after the process and the process of setting the high base flag). With such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 2R Since the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot is 50%, once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state.

In addition, in FIG. 10-1, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

Further, in FIG. 10-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-1, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time. On the other hand, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation. In other words, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (or is more likely to be executed) in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is more likely to be the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. This is the first shortened state. In the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state) in which the first shortened state is obtained, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The display ratio may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than the second shortened state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) and the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT). In the state) and the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed with a long fluctuation, while the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed with a normal fluctuation time. Will be done. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (or is executed at a higher rate) in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / low base state (second KT). The state) is the second shortened state in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than that of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is high. In the second embodiment, the second shortened state is a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and a high probability / In the low base state (second KT state), the ratio of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is configured to be, for example, 100%. It may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state, the relief time reduction control includes a control for increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol, a control for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and a variable winning ball device 6B (second). In addition to the control related to the normal symbol, which is to lengthen the opening time of the start winning opening), the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is larger than the variation display of the first special symbol. The control related to the special symbol is performed, that is, the control is performed in the second shortened state in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation time is high). That is, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (for example, it corresponds to the portion where the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment is executed).

However, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol Even if the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display, the variation display of one of the special symbols is not forcibly stopped. In such a configuration, for example, in the normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( When controlled to a high base state), the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped, and the variation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, the variation time is 10 minutes). It is conceivable that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time has been shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency has been improved) cannot be executed until the end of the procedure, and the benefit of the shortened relief time cannot be obtained. Then, in such a state, even if the relief time is controlled to be shortened, the progress of the game is significantly delayed and the interest is reduced.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than the big hit and the time reduction, it becomes a small hit (or a small hit rather than the loss (no time reduction)). The ratio is high). That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result is either a big hit, a small hit, or a time saving loss, and the display result is not a loss (no time reduction) (or a small hit rather than a loss (no time reduction). The ratio is high). Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display, the out-of-order symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the special symbols (for example, step 061IWS1126A in the first embodiment). Corresponds to the part that executes the processing of S1129A, S1126B, S1129B).

By combining these configurations, in the second embodiment, when the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display (long variation) of the second special symbol, As the control of the relief time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is larger than the variation display of the first special symbol. The control related to the special symbol is performed, that is, the second shortened state (in this example, the control is performed in the low probability / high base state (first KT state)) in which the ratio of the fluctuation display of the short fluctuation time is high. At this time, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established is a small hit unless it is a big hit or a time reduction deviation. Then, based on the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display (long variation) of the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in which the fluctuation time is shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency is improved) without waiting for the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation (for example, 10 minutes) to expire. You can benefit from shorter relief times. In addition, the game can proceed smoothly when the relief time is controlled to be shortened, and the interest can be improved.

(Example of controlling the gaming state in the second embodiment)
Next, an example of controlling the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-2 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the second embodiment.

In FIG. 10-2, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol, which is out of time, is started, and the relief time reduction is displayed during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. An example of controlling the gaming state when the variation display (small hit) of the first special symbol to be established is started is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, when the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time is established is started (T1 timing), the normal state (low probability / low base state) is changed to the low probability / high base state (T1 timing). The control to shift to the first KT state is performed (for example, it corresponds to the portion where the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A in the first embodiment is executed). At this time, the number of time reductions is set to 800 times.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-2, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time is shortened, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is forcibly removed. Is derived and displayed (T2 timing). At this time, the number of time reductions is not updated due to the time reduction deviation. That is, the time saving state due to the relief time saving, which has a higher number of times of time saving than the time saving loss and has a high advantage, is maintained.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-2, after the T2 timing, the fluctuation time is shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency is improved) in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and the second special It becomes possible to execute the variable display of the symbol.

In the feature unit 116IW, the configuration shown in the first embodiment and the configuration shown in the second embodiment can be appropriately combined and configured.

For example, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the low-probability / high-base state (low-probability / first KT state) controlled based on the derivation and display of the time-saving out-of-time symbol. The advantage is lower than the advantage of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) controlled based on the establishment of the relief time reduction (for example, the number of time reductions is 800 times via the relief time reduction). On the other hand, the number of time reductions is 100 times via the time reduction deviation. (See Fig. 10-1), but when the time reduction deviation symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established, it is low based on the relief time reduction being established. Probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) can be controlled (for example, corresponding to a portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment). It may be configured. With such a configuration, even in the second embodiment, even if the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established, the low probability / high base state (low probability) based on the relief time reduction is established. / Since it is controlled to the first KT state), the degree of relief of the player can be increased (for example, the investment amount of the player can be suppressed).

Further, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is a variable display of the special symbol that is a big hit, is a variable display. If the relief time reduction is established by executing the variation display of the other special symbol before the display result of the variation display of the one special symbol is derived and displayed during the execution of, the relief time is increased based on the establishment of the relief time reduction. It is controlled to the base state (in this example, the low probability / high base state (first KT state) of 800 times of time reduction via the relief time reduction) (for example, in the portion where steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment are executed. (Corresponding to), even if the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed in one of the special symbols's variation display, the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, which is a highly advantageous base state (for example, 100 times of time-saving through the time-saving out-of-time). The low probability / high base state (first KT state) of With such a configuration, also in the second embodiment, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the relief time is shortened. The advantage of the base state can be secured, and the degree of relief of the player can be increased (for example, the investment amount of the player can be suppressed).

Further, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the variation of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed during the execution of the variation display of the other special symbol. Based on the derivation display of the small hit symbol in the display, the out-of-order symbol can be derivated and displayed in the variable display of one of the special symbols (for example, steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in the first embodiment). It may be configured to correspond to the part to be executed). With such a configuration, even in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the jackpot symbol from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the special symbol, and the effect of the player's intentional capture is minimized. It can be suppressed to the limit.

(Modification 2)
Next, the configuration of the modified example 2 in the feature portion 116IW will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-3 to 10-11. In the above-mentioned feature unit 116IW, if the probability change state (high probability state) is controlled in both the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the probability change state (high probability) until the next big hit occurs. The state) is maintained, but in the second modification, when the probability change state is controlled, the fall determination of whether or not to end the probability change state is performed. Specifically, in the fall determination, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state based on the result of the fall lottery process, which is different from the big hit lottery process for determining whether to control the jackpot. Then, when it is determined in the fall lottery process that the probabilistic state is terminated, the probabilistic state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Hereinafter, ending the probabilistic state after being determined to end the probabilistic state by the fall lottery process may be referred to as "falling". Further, although the modified example 2 will be specifically described below, detailed description of the same portion as the feature portion 116IW will be omitted.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probabilistic fall in the modified example 2. FIG. 10-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot probability and the probability change fall probability in the probability change state. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the second modification, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is set to about 1/200, and the probability variation fall probability is set to about 1/800.

FIG. 10-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gaming state controlled after a probable change fall. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the modified example 2, in the probabilistic state after the big hit game by the probabilistic big hit, if the probabilistic fall occurs with less than 100 fluctuations, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is immediately changed. Although it ends, the time saving state (high base state) continues until it reaches 100 fluctuations. That is, it is controlled to a low probability / low base state. Then, when the fluctuation reaches 100 after the big hit game, the normal state (low probability / low base state) is controlled. In addition, in the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit, if the probability change falls after 100 fluctuations, the time saving state (high base state) ends together with the probability change state (high probability state), and the normal state (low probability). / Low base state) is controlled.

That is, in the modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), at least the time saving state (high base state) is secured up to 100 fluctuations after the probability variation jackpot.

FIG. 10-3 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a fanning reach executed in connection with a probable fall. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), in the second modification, the fanning reach A to C is provided as the fanning reach.

In the fan reach A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probabilistic fall occurs and the probable change state ends, the probabilistic fall is notified. After the execution of the fan reach A, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state).

In the fan reach B, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution will be a big hit or whether the probability change state will end due to the probability change fall, it will be notified once that the probability change state will end, and then the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. Notify that it is controlled to (high base state). After the execution of the fan reach B, it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability / high base state) by the relief time saving.

In the fan reach C, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution is a big hit or a probable change fall and the probable change state ends, a big hit is notified. After the execution of the fan reach C, it is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(First special symbol normal processing in modification 2)
10-4 to 10-7 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal processing in the second modification.

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS50A to S56A are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the second modification, since the process of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, the relief time reduction counter update process is executed even in the probability change state (high probability state). Will be done. That is, not only in the non-probability state (low probability state), but also in the probability change state (high probability state), when the fluctuation display is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened uniformly decreases. It is configured in. Therefore, in the second modification, the probability variation flag may be set when the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction becomes “0”.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0" and the probability change flag is set (Y in step 061IWS56061A), that is, when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state, step 061IWS5701A is set. Transition.

Further, in the second modification, "100" is set in the high base count counter after the probability variation jackpot, and the high base count counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A each time the fluctuation display is executed. Here, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the probability change flag is set, that is, the probability change state even if the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit reaches 100 fluctuations If it has not fallen, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and the high base state are maintained until the probabilistic fall occurs.

On the other hand, when the value of the high base count counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the probability change flag is not set, that is, in the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit, the probability change falls with less than 100 fluctuations and the probability change. If only the flag is reset (when the processing of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described later is executed), or if it is controlled to the low probability / high base state after the normal big hit, the high base flag is reset (step). 061IWS5620A). By the processing of step 061IWS56191A, in the modified example 2, in the probabilistic state after the big hit game by the probabilistic big hit, if the probabilistic change falls with less than 100 fluctuations, the probabilistic change state (high probability state) ends immediately, but the time saving state. (High base state) continues until 100 fluctuations are reached.

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment. In the second modification, when step 061IWS5621A is completed, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief time reduction flag indicating that the relief time reduction has been established in the probabilistic state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

When the probability change flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 has a fall determination random number (a random number for jackpot determination or a random number for jackpot type determination) stored in the random number buffer area. A random number dedicated to the fall determination, which is different, is read out, and a fall lottery process is performed based on the fall determination random number (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the fall determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the probability variation fall lottery. I do. When the game control microcomputer 100 matches the fall determination value, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the probability change state is terminated. In the second modification, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is determined that the probability variation state is terminated with a probability of, for example, 1/800.

If the probabilistic change does not fall (the probable change state is not terminated) (N at 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. If it is determined to end the probabilistic state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter capable of counting the number of fluctuations in the probability change state after the jackpot game and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether or not the fluctuation is less than 100 fluctuations after the jackpot game.

When the fluctuation is less than 100 after the big hit game (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the fan reach A flag indicating that the fan reach A is executed. Set (step 061IWS5713A). After that, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

By the process of step 061IWS5711A, in the modification 2, if the probability change state after the big hit game by the probability change big hit is less than 100 fluctuations and the probability change falls, only the probability change flag is reset. Further, by the process of step 061IWS5713A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probabilistic fall occurs and the probable change state ends, the fan reach A for notifying that the probable change falls is executed is executed. NS.

If it is not less than 100 fluctuations after the jackpot game (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief time reduction flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, The probability change flag and the high base flag are reset, and the probability change state and the time saving state are ended (step 061IWS5712A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fan reach A flag indicating that the fan reach A is executed (061IWS5713A).

In this example, it is configured to execute the same fan reach A in the case where the probabilistic fall occurs after the probabilistic jackpot game with less than 100 fluctuations and the case where the probabilistic fall occurs after 100 fluctuations. For example, in the case of a probabilistic fall with less than 100 fluctuations after the probabilistic jackpot game, the probabilistic fall may be notified and then the time saving state may be notified. It is possible to prevent the player from being greatly discouraged due to a probable fall in a short period of time.

When the relief time reduction flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief time reduction flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets "800" in the high base count counter (step 061IWS5708A). .. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). After that, the fan reach B flag indicating that the fan reach B is to be executed is set (061IWS5710A), and the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the relief time reduction is established after the probable change fall, it is controlled from the time when the relief time reduction is established to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the relief time reduction, and if the relief time reduction is established before the probability change fall, the probability change fall occurs. If the configuration is controlled to the normal state from a certain point in time, the benefits that can be received depending on the timing of establishment of the relief time reduction will differ greatly, and there is a risk that the relief will be insufficient. Therefore, in the second modification, if the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state by the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A, the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction is controlled when the probability change falls. There is. Therefore, the counting of 800 times of the time reduction due to the relief time reduction is started not when the relief time reduction is established, but after the probable change falls and the time reduction state is entered. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately receive relief by shortening the relief time.

Further, by the process of step 061IWS5707A, the relief time reduction flag is reset when the relief time reduction flag is controlled to the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction when the probable change falls. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the relief time reduction has been established in the probable change state.

Information indicating the state of the relief time reduction flag is stored in, for example, the RAM 102. Then, when the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction flag and the probability change flag are reset. That is, if the RAM clear process is executed in the probability change state in which the relief time reduction is established, the game state becomes the normal state (low probability / low base state) in which the relief time reduction flag is not set. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the relief time reduction has been established in the probable change state.

In the RAM clear processing, the probability change flag is reset, but the relief time reduction flag is maintained, and when the probability change flag is not set at the start of fluctuation but the relief time reduction flag is set. , The relief time may be controlled to a short time (low probability / high base state). That is, if the RAM clear process is executed when the relief time reduction is established and the RAM clear processing is executed, the game state becomes the normal state (low probability / low base state), but when the variation display is started, the relief time is shortened. It may be controlled.

Further, by the processing of step 061IWS5710A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change fall occurs and the probable change state ends, the probable change fall is once notified, and then the relief time is shortened. A fan reach B is executed to notify that the time is controlled to a short time state (high base state).

As shown in FIG. 10-7, in the modification 2, when the jackpot is determined by the execution of the jackpot determination module, it is reset if the relief time reduction flag is set (step 061IWS631A). By the process of step 061IWS631A, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the relief time reduction has been established in the probabilistic state. In addition, it is possible to prevent excessive relief from being performed.

Further, in the second modification, when the jackpot is determined by the execution of the jackpot determination module and the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fan reach C. Set the fan reach C flag to indicate execution (061IWS633A).

By the processing of steps 061IWS632A to S633A, after suggesting whether the display result of the fluctuation display during execution becomes a big hit or the probable change fall and the probable change state ends, the fan reach C for notifying that the big hit is executed is executed. ..

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the second modification, it is determined whether or not any of the fan reach A to C is set, and if it is set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding fan reach is determined. do. Other processes are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

In the second modification, in the second special symbol normal process and the second variation pattern setting process, the same processes as those of the first special symbol normal process and the first variation pattern setting process are executed. Therefore, in the modified example 2, it is possible to execute the probabilistic fall lottery and the fan reach in both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the first fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process, when any of the fan reach A to C is set and the number of fluctuations in the probability variation state after the big hit game exceeds 100 fluctuations, the fan is fanned. Reach may be performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-8, until the number of fluctuations in the probabilistic state after the big hit game reaches 100 fluctuations, a common effect (for example, common effect) regardless of whether or not the probabilistic fall has occurred. The background image is displayed) may be executed. That is, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the fall has occurred up to the 100th fluctuation. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the probability change fall determination effect for notifying whether the probability change falls or the probability change is continued at the 100th fluctuation may be executed.

For example, when the probabilistic fall has already occurred, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern A for notifying that the probabilistic fall has occurred is executed. Further, when the probabilistic fall has already occurred but the relief time is controlled, the probabilistic change of the mode of the pattern B which notifies that the relief time is controlled after notifying that the relief fall has occurred. The fall determination effect is executed.
Further, when a big hit is obtained at the 100th variation, the probability change fall determination effect of the mode of the pattern C notifying that the big hit is obtained is executed. Further, when the probabilistic state continues, the probabilistic fall determination effect of the aspect of the pattern D for notifying that the probabilistic state continues is executed.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 10-8, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player in the period after the 100th change in the probabilistic state and improve the interest.

In the second modification, when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state, it is configured to notify that the relief time is shortened after being notified that the probability change fall has occurred. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, when the relief time reduction is established in the probable change state, it may not be notified at all even if the probable change falls. That is, even if the probable change falls, the notification to that effect is not given or the effect does not change, and the probable change may occur without the player noticing.

(Example of production in Modification 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning reach in the modified example 2 will be described. FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the fanning Lee in the modified example 2. In FIG. 10-9, the fan reach A is in the order of (1), (2), and (3-1), and the fan reach B is in the order of (1), (2), (3-2), and (4). The effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3-3).

In the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned, the friendly character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a are in the reach state as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2). The fan reach to perform the battle is started.

Then, in the case of the fan reach A, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (3-1), the probabilistic fall image 014IW004a is displayed to notify that the ally character 014IW002 is defeated in the battle and becomes a probable fall. After that, it shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state).

In the case of fanned reach B, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (3-2), the probabilistic fall image 014IW004a that informs that the ally character 014IW002 is defeated in the battle and becomes a probable fall is displayed once. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (4), the character display of "chance mode entry" and the relief time reduction image 014IW004c for notifying that the relief time is controlled are displayed. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 10-9 (4), and for example, the time saving rush effect shown in FIG. 9-39 may be executed. After that, it shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state).

In the case of fan reach C, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (3-3), a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify that the ally character 014IW002 wins the battle and becomes a jackpot. After that, it shifts to the jackpot game state.

In the second modification, when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state, the relief time reduction establishment notification is executed to notify the fact. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-10 (1) and 10-10 (2), the image display device 5 has a "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that when the relief time reduction is established at the start of fluctuation, the mode is controlled to the chance mode (relief time reduction). It is displayed in a part of. In the relief time reduction notification as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, when it is determined that the relief time reduction has been established on the main board 11, an effect control command indicating that effect is transmitted to the effect control board 12. When the effect control command is received on the effect control board 12 side, it can be realized by controlling the display of the "chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the probabilistic state, which can give the player a sense of security and improve the interest.

Note that the relief time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 10-10 is performed not only in the probabilistic state but also when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state or when the relief time reduction is controlled to the time reduction state (or). It may be done by lottery).

(Example of controlling the gaming state in Modification 2)
Next, a control example of the gaming state in the second modification will be described. FIG. 10-11 is a time chart for explaining a control example of the gaming state in the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), if the relief time reduction is not established in the probabilistic state before the probabilistic fall occurs (T1 timing), the probabilistic change flag and the high base flag Is reset, and the gaming state shifts from the high probability / high base state to the low probability / low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the relief time reduction is established in the probability change state until the probability change falls, for example, the relief time reduction is established at the t1 timing in FIG. 10-11 (B). If so, the relief time reduction flag is set at the t1 timing. Then, when the probability change falls (t2 timing), the probability change flag and the relief time reduction flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. That is, the gaming state shifts from the high probability / high base state to the low probability / high base state.

The configuration shown in the second modification is applicable to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a fall lottery is executed in a high probability / high base state (second probability variation state), and if a winner is won, a normal state (low probability / low base) is executed. It may be made to shift to the state). Further, when applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery is executed when the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is obtained, and if the player wins, the normal state (low probability / low) is obtained. It may be made to shift to the base state).

In both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be feasible in parallel. Not limited to such a configuration, a configuration in which the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the order of starting winning, or one of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The configuration shown in the second modification can also be applied to the configuration.

Further, in the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, a case where the application is applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variation display result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a character game that controls a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a specific area (V winning area) in the character during a small hit game. The configuration for controlling the feature portion 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied.

Further, in the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear processing is executed or the jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter at random may be set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, information that can specify the number of occurrences of the relief time reduction may be retained. For example, the high base flag set in the second relief time reduction that has been transferred again may be different from the high base flag set in the first relief time reduction.

In the feature portion 116IW and each modification shown above, different effects are executed depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief (for example, different background display). Is displayed, or it is determined to have a different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time)).

Further, in the feature unit 116IW and each modification shown above, in controlling the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probabilistic control is performed until the next jackpot occurs (or until the probabilistic fall occurs). The case where it is applied to is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in controlling the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state, the so-called ST in which the upper limit number of times of the special figure game (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol) in which the probability variation control is performed is set. A configuration for controlling the feature portion 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied to the machine.

Specifically, as a so-called ST machine, the jackpot probability is about 1/100, the probability variation state is controlled at a rate of 100% after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the maximum number of special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed (for example). , 8 times) will be described in a case where the configuration for controlling the feature unit 116IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification is applied to the gaming machine. In the gaming machine of the ST machine, a plurality of types of jackpots (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, etc.) are provided as display results of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. When a big hit occurs, it is assumed that the big hit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) has the highest degree of advantage at a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%). In addition, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the probability change control is performed 8 times as the upper limit of the special figure game. Suppose that is set. Then, if a big hit does not occur in the eight special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed, the maximum number of times in the special figure game in which the time is reduced (low probability / high base state) and the high base control is performed is set. It is assumed that 249 times are set. That is, after the end of the big hit game state, if the next big hit does not occur, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then the time reduction state (low probability) with 249 time reductions. / High base state) shall be controlled.

Even if the game machine of the above ST machine finishes the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) in a non-probability state (low probability state) after the power is turned on to the game machine or a big hit occurs, the next big hit will be given. If it does not occur, it is possible to apply a configuration controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state) assuming that the relief time saving is established.

When such a configuration is applied, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is first controlled to the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) with the probability variation number of 8 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a big hit. Then, since it is in the probability change state (high probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated.

When the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes is completed without a big hit, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reductions is controlled. At this time, since it is a non-probability change state (low probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is set every time the special figure game (that is, the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol) is executed. Updated (eg, subtracted by 1).

When the time saving state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time saving is completed without the big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state). However, at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special symbol game (variation display of the first special symbol or variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. It will be. Here, if there is a hold memory stored in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time reduction, a special symbol game (variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) based on the hold memory. By executing (variation display), the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the transition to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to improve the interest.

When the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) ends and the relief time reduction is once controlled to the low base state (normal state), the background image corresponding to the high base state is continuously displayed. You may try to do it. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages stored at the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time saving is established. If it is determined that the image is large, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, after the end of the time saving state of 249 times of time saving, the normal state controlled before the relief time saving is established (that is, the reserved memory stored in the time saving state after being controlled once after the time saving state is digested. The normal state) in which the relief time is shortened within the period until it is completed) is also called a special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

Further, for example, when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is controlled by the relief time saving. Alternatively, a mode transition effect indicating that the control of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) by the relief time saving is started may be executed. In this case, after the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the fluctuation display in the low base state (normal state) before the occurrence of the relief time reduction (for example, the fluctuation display immediately after the end of the time reduction state, or the relief time reduction The mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display immediately before the establishment of the above, or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display in which the relief time is shortened.

Further, for example, in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, when a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (for example, a 5R probability variation jackpot) is obtained among a plurality of types of jackpots, the next jackpot is awarded after the jackpot gaming state ends. If it does not occur, it is controlled to a probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then to a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 32 time reductions. That is, in the case of a big hit with a low degree of advantage, even if the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends, a short period (for example, in the time saving state) It is assumed that the relief time reduction is not established within the period (the period until the stored reserved memory is digested).

In this case, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 32 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). Is to execute left-handed notification (for example, display of left-handed instruction display instructing left-handed in the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability / low base state) after the end of the final fluctuation in the time saving state. Then, when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), the same left-handed notification may not be executed after the end of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state. That is, the left-handed notification (for example, the display of the left-handed instruction display instructing the left-handed on the image display device 5) may not be executed at the time of transition to the special normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player has once transitioned to the low base state (normal state) when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time after the end of the time reduction state. You can improve your interest.

In addition, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) (low probability / high base state) is 32 (that is, when the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). And when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established in a short period of time), for example, a background specification command, a jackpot start designation command, a jackpot end designation command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 side, etc. By different types of effect control commands, the effect control board 12 distinguishes between those time saving states, and the effect control matching each time saving state (for example, displaying the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc.) , BGM output, etc.). The method of distinguishing the time saving state on the effect control board 12 side is not limited to such a method, and for example, the jackpot type and the number of time saving after the jackpot game may be specified by the received display result designation command.

When the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), a left-handed notification (for example, an image display device) is sent on the effect control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed. Even if the configuration is such that the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed is not executed in No. 5, the main board 11 side has once shifted to the normal state (that is, left-handed from the right-handed state). The process corresponding to (switched to the state to be performed) (for example, turning off the right-handed display 26, stopping the output of the right-handed test signal output as a test signal, changing the firing position designation signal, etc.) is executed. During the transition to the normal state (that is, the special normal state), the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, 2 jackpot signals) may be temporarily stopped on the main board 11 side. , The external output may be continued. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, 2 jackpot signals), the output of the launch position designation signal output as the test signal is changed (or the output of the right-handed test signal is stopped). ) May be done.

Further, for example, the effect to be executed may be different between the time saving state (or the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 249 times) and the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state). For example, an effect that suggests that the relief time reduction is established or the number of times until the relief time is established (for example, a countdown effect) can be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), while the remaining time is shortened. It may not be executed in the time saving state where the number of times is indicated (or the time saving state where the number of times of time saving is 249 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the above effects can be obtained is not limited to the configuration of the number of time reductions in the time reduction state controlled after the probability variation state used in the above description and the configuration of the number of fluctuations (non-probability variation state) in which the relief time reduction is established. .. For example, the number of fluctuations in which the relief time reduction is established (non-probability change state) is larger than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning opening (for example, the second start) that makes it easier to enter in the time reduction state. It may be configured to be smaller than (or the same as) the sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry into the winning opening). With such a configuration, even if the player shifts to the low base state (normal state) through the probability change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit game state. , Since the relief time reduction can be established without generating a new start prize in the low base state (normal state), the player is aware that the player has shifted to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time reduction is established. It can be prevented and the interest can be improved.

Further, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) than the time reduction number in the time reduction state, the time reduction is controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state). The relief time reduction can be established before the state (low probability / high base state) ends (that is, the number of time reductions can be updated by the establishment of the relief time reduction).

In the above-mentioned ST machine, the probability changes after the end of the big hit game state between when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It seems that the number of time reductions in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled through the state (high probability / high base state) is different (or the ratio of the advantageous time reduction number among multiple types of time reduction times is different). It may be configured as. In this case, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled through a probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit game state. ) Is 32 times (or 32 times out of 249 times is high), and when a big hit occurs due to the variation display of the second special symbol, after the end of the big hit game state , The number of time reductions in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) controlled through the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 249 times (or the number of time reductions is 32 times, 249 times out of 249 times. The ratio is high).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs (or the number of rounds of a plurality of types) when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the ratio of the number of advantageous rounds is different). For example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is 5 rounds (or 5 rounds, and the ratio of 5 rounds out of 10 rounds is high), and the 2nd special symbol When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of, the number of rounds in the big hit game state may be 10 rounds (or 5 rounds, and the ratio of 10 rounds out of 10 rounds is high) may be set. With such a configuration, the advantage can be different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, which improves the interest. Can be made to.

Further, also in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving are also performed. ) And, different variation pattern tables may be used. For example, in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability variation state (high probability / high base state). A variation pattern table may be used in which the rate of determination of the variation pattern is high (and, for example, the rate of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of deviation is low). .. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of deviation is low in reach (or reach with particularly high expectation), so that the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 116IW shown above and the gaming machine of each modified example, for example, as a jackpot type, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is continued until the next jackpot occurs. Probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot A controlled by time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 100 time reduction times, and non-probability variation jackpot A controlled by time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reduction times. Probability change jackpot B is provided, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 fluctuation displays are completed in the non-probability change state after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the jackpot occurs, the relief time is shortened. It may be configured to do so. That is, the time reduction state is controlled until just before the relief time reduction is established (specifically, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning opening (for example, the second start winning opening) that is easy to enter in the time reduction state). A jackpot type may be provided in which the sum with the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry is larger (or the same) than the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established. With such a configuration, a gaming state in which the time saving state after the big hit game is shifted to the time saving state due to the relief time saving (actually, it is temporarily controlled to the normal state (that is, the special normal state) before the relief time saving is established). The transition will be carried out, and the interest can be improved.

As described above, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 116-1-1) to (means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and a specific display result (for example, a big hit) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of the symbol), and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) can be updated. Means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). ) Is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification. Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of the information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. As a result, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed. At that time, a notification effect execution means (for example, a time saving rush effect shown in FIGS. 9-39) that can execute a notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect shown in FIGS. 9-39) for notifying that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS806B) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-1-2) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and a specific display result (for example, a big hit) is executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of the symbol), and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) can be updated. Means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). ) Is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and the update means is the first identification. Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of the information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By doing so, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display is being executed, a notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect shown in FIG. 9-40) that notifies that the special state is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition can be executed. Further provided means of execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-2) The means 116-1-1 includes a special variable display pattern (for example, a first fluctuation pattern # M (relief time shortening rush loss) and a second fluctuation pattern # L (relief time shortening rush loss)). A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means satisfies a special condition. The special variable display pattern can be determined (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B), and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special conditions are satisfied. The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B, and the effect control. The part where the computer 120 executes steps 108 IWS805 and S806B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition by the notification effect.

(Means 116-3) In means 116-1-2, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B). The variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, so that the variable display pattern can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 9-40). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-3, the special state control means becomes an advantageous state in either a special state or a non-special state (for example, a low base state). Depending on whether it is controlled, it is possible to control to a special state having different advantages after the end of the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. During the normal state. When a 6R jackpot A occurs in (low base state) and is controlled to a time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and a 6R jackpot is performed during the time saving state (high base state). When A occurs and is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state of 200 times of time saving (see FIG. 9-6), and the variable display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. If is a specific display result, the advantage of the special state to be controlled after the end of the advantageous state is determined, assuming that the advantageous state is controlled in the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines step 061IWS59A, The portion where the jackpot determination module of S59B is executed after the relief time reduction counter update process and the high base flag setting process of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 116-5) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-4, the game medium is used in the first path (for example, the left-handed route) and the second path (for example, the right-handed route). A launch promotion notification means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched toward either the game area that can be separated and the first path or the second path. The right-handed instruction display 100IW108 and the part that displays the left-handed instruction display) are provided, and the launch promotion notification means should launch the game medium toward the second path when the notification effect is executed. The launch promotion notification can be executed (for example, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when the time saving rush effect is executed. See FIGS. 9-39 (B) and (C)). According to such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be appropriately executed.

(Means 116-6) In any of the means 116-1-1 to the means 116-5, the special condition is controlled based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied in response to the start of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to output a signal that can identify that (for example, 4 jackpot signals), and output a signal that can identify that the variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display (for example, a variable stop signal). It is provided with a possible signal output means (see, for example, FIG. 9-33). According to such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition to the outside at an appropriate timing.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 117-1) to (means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) and the special state (for example, in the high base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning opening). The means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are performed in parallel. (For example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B) and the variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. The low probability in the first embodiment that the first shortened state (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol) with a high ratio of the variable display of the period. / Low base state (normal state), low probability / high base state, and high probability / high base state (second probability variation state). See FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 and 9-33) and the second. The variable display of the identification information is shorter than the variable display of the first identification information. The ratio of the variable display of the variable display period to the variable display is high. Can be controlled to a high probability / low base state (first probabilistic state) in the first embodiment, which is executed with a short fluctuation time. See FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9 and 9-33). The game control microcomputer 100 includes a shortened state control means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206), and the update means includes the first identification information. Numerical information is updated between the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state The control means means that the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display executing means is the first identification information and Display result of variable display of one of the identification information based on the fact that a special condition is satisfied by executing variable display of the other identification information during execution of variable display of one of the second identification information. Is not derived and displayed (see, for example, FIG. 9-35 (A)), and the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information. In the variable display of the second identification information, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result can be derived and displayed (for example, a portion where the game control computer 100 executes steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B). The shortened state control means can control the first shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B). part. When the relief time reduction is established, the variation display of the first special symbol shifts to the low probability / high base state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variation time than the variation display of the second special symbol. 9-34). According to such a configuration, since the first shortened state is controlled after the special condition is satisfied, the game can proceed smoothly, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 117-2) In the means 117-1, the variable display executing means has a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps. 061IWS2032A, S2032B execution part), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, for game control). The part where the microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B (see FIG. 9-35 (A)), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result. The degree is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the time saving state via the relief time saving is 800 times, whereas the time saving state via the time saving time saving is 800 times. The number of time reductions is 100 (see FIG. 9-6). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 117-3) In the means 117-1 or the means 117-2, the special state control means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and the special display result is obtained. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the special state based on the above (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. The special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B). According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 117-4) In any of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display executing means has a specific display result and a predetermined display result as display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. A special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, the other identification information can be displayed. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B). , The part that executes S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 117-5) In any of means 117-1 to 117-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 118-1) to (means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of, and is an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter). For example, in the first embodiment, the portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed) and the special state (for example, in the high base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening)). The means (for example, the portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 in the first embodiment) and the variable display of the first identification information are shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. In the second embodiment, in which the first shortened state (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the variable display of the second special symbol) in which the ratio of the variable display of the variable display period is high is high. Low probability / low base state (normal state). See Fig. 10-1), and the second is that the variable display of the second identification information is a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information. The low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) in the second embodiment in which the shortened state (for example, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). ), High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and high probability / low base state (second KT state). See FIG. 10-1). In the embodiment of the above, step 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206 are executed), and the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion where steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment), and the special state control means is updated. Numerical information updated by the means However, when the special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state is set. It is controllable (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. As a display result, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result can be derived and displayed, and during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result in the variable display of the one identification information (for example). , Step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in the first embodiment) (For example, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) in the second embodiment). According to such a configuration, while the variable display of one of the identification information is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Since the display result is derived and displayed and controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is satisfied, the game can proceed smoothly and the interest can be improved.

(Means 118-2) In the means 118-1, the variable display executing means has a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result (for example, the step in the first embodiment). When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (corresponding to the part where 061IWS2032A and S2032B are executed), it is possible to control the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition (for example,). Steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment), the advantage of the special state controlled based on the derivation display of the special display result is It is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is 800 times, whereas the time reduction state via the time reduction is 100 times. Times. See Figure 10-1). According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 118-3) In the means 118-1 or the means 118-2, the special state control means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and the special display result is obtained. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the special state based on the above (for example, corresponding to the portion where steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B are executed in the first embodiment), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. However, the special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, it corresponds to the portion where steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B are executed in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 118-4) In any of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display executing means has a specific display result and a predetermined display result as display results of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. A special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result can be derived and displayed, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, the other identification information can be displayed. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B in the first embodiment). , Corresponds to the part that executes S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 118-5) In any of means 118-1 to 118-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, it corresponds to the portion where steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Further, the features 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 119-1) to (means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of, and is an update means that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter). For example, in the first embodiment, there are a portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, low probability / low base state). A controllable special state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 in the first embodiment) and a specific state that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state. A specific state control means that can be controlled (for example, a high probability state) (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment) and an end that determines to end the specific state in the specific state by lottery. Based on the determination means (for example, the portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the modification 2) and the end determination means, the normal state control means that can control the normal state (for example, the portion that executes steps 061IWS5704A and S5712A in the modification 2) is executed. And the notification effect that can notify whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state (for example, the fan reach A to C shown in FIGS. 10-9). (For example, a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A, the processing of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the state of the fanning reach flags A to C, etc. in the modification 2). The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in the first embodiment, step 061IWS5603A, In the special state control means (the part that executes S5603B), the numerical information updated by the update means is a specific value (for example, a relief time reduction counter) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By setting the value to "0"), it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state is terminated by the end determination means after the special condition is satisfied. A portion that is controllable to a special state after it has been determined (eg, performing steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A-S5709A in variant 2). (See FIG. 10-11), the notification effect execution means is controlled to the special state when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state (for example, FIGS. 10-9 (3-2), (4). It can be notified by the fan reach B) shown in. According to such a configuration, even when the specific state ends, the player is relieved because the notification effect notifies that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition. It can be given and the interest can be improved.

(Means 119-2) In the means 119-1, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, a special information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing special information (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition is satisfied. ), And the special information is erased based on being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the part where step 061IWS631A is executed in the second modification). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in the specific state.

(Means 119-3) In means 119-1 or means 119-2, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating that the special condition is satisfied can be stored. The means (for example, RAM 102) is provided, and the special information is erased based on being controlled to the special state after the specific state ends (for example, the portion where step 061IWS5707A is executed in the second modification). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in the specific state.

(Means 119-4) In means 119-1 to 119-3, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage indicating that the special condition is satisfied (for example, a relief time saving flag) can be stored. A means (for example, RAM 102) is provided, and the specific state control means can end the control of the specific state by executing the initialization process (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8). , The special information is deleted by executing the initialization process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in the specific state.

(Means 119-5) From means 119-1 to means 119-4, a special condition establishment notification effect for notifying that a special condition is satisfied in a specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (2), a chance mode). A special condition establishment notification effect executing means capable of executing the "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that the image is controlled by (relief time reduction) is displayed on a part of the image display device 5. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the special state is controlled after the end of the specific state, which can give the player a sense of security and improve the interest.

(Means 119-6) In means 119-1 to 119-5, when the special state control means finishes the specific state by the time the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the specific state. In addition, it is possible to control the special state until the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, the portion where steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A are executed in the modification 2), and the notification effect executing means sets the predetermined number of times. When the variable display is executed beyond that, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is displayed (for example, the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in the second modification). Or, the part where the process of determining the fluctuation pattern according to the states of the fan reach flags A to C is controlled to the probabilistic state and then executed after the 100th fluctuation (see FIG. 10-8). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player and improve the interest.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of fluctuations of a symbol is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit. Some were controlled to a probabilistic state based on (that is, based on a special number of fluctuations (eg, 1000) without a jackpot). Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the symbol variation is frequently executed) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in the effect control in the gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number of times. Therefore, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 113-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of, and to the starting condition (for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Variable display execution means (for example, for game control) capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the game ball winning) and the start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the variable state) is satisfied. A portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes steps S110A to S113A) and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, the first hold storage number). Before the determination by the determination means (for example, the part that executes steps 113IWS59A and S59B in the game control microcomputer 100) and the determination means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, the buffer, the second reserved storage number buffer). In addition, a determination means capable of determining that the control is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a portion in which step S101A is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and a determination result obtained by the determination means are used to control the control in the advantageous state. A specific suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion specific suggestion effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect of the first aspect) and a state in which a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a start condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal state can be controlled. An update means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) and numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 includes (a portion in which steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed), and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the state control means uses the numerical information updated by the updating means as the number of times the variable display is executed. A specific value (for example, 800 times) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) For example, when the special condition is satisfied by setting the value of the relief time reduction counter to "0"), it is possible to control the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B). (Part to be executed), special suggestion effect related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, a fan effect that suggests the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display effect, etc.) Further provided with means, the specific suggestion effect executing means targets the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied. The execution of the specific suggestion effect can be restricted (for example, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect straddling before and after the start of control to the relief time reduction is prohibited), and the numerical information updated by the update means is less than the special number of times. The execution of the specific suggestion effect is restricted in the predetermined period from the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") to reach the specific value (for example,). Execution of the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction is prohibited). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and to suppress the deterioration of the interest while avoiding the occurrence of defects in the production.

It should be noted that if the time is already controlled to the time saving state, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving is not prohibited, and even if the time saving state is controlled, the relief time is shortened. The execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of control of the above may be prohibited.

In addition, the special suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period from the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined number of times when the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches the specific value, and the specific suggestion effect is executed in the predetermined period. It may be a limiting configuration. Specifically, the execution of the countdown effect suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction may be started from the timing when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction becomes 10 times, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect may be prohibited. As a result, the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect are not performed in duplicate, so that the effect can be suppressed from becoming complicated and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

(Means 113-2) The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, for game control). The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed. (See FIG. 9-6), and when the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can control the special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example,). , The part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B), a special suggestion effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed based on the judgment result by the judgment means ( For example, the special suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice effect of the second aspect is further provided, and the special suggestion effect execution means has a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the update means is less than the special number of times. ) Correspondingly (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is “10”) to reach a specific value, the execution of the special suggestion effect is restricted (for example, immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction). The execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect in the fluctuation of the above is prohibited). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the production from becoming complicated, suppress the deterioration of the interest, and increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 113-3) The predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 times or less) is earlier than the predetermined period (for example, until the relief time is shortened). It may be assumed that the execution rate of the special suggestion effect is higher than that of the period in which the remaining number of times is 11 times or more. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player due to the end of the game immediately before the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 113-4) The ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the special suggestion effect execution means executes the special suggestion effect according to the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened). May be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to establish the special condition and to improve the interest.

(Means 113-5) An explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an effect for explaining a relief time reduction) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

As for the explanatory effect, the execution rate and the selection rate of the effect mode may be different depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. For example, the explanation effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. In addition, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect of the countdown effect and the effect effect suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is reduced by lowering the execution ratio of the explanation effect. It may be suppressed.

(Means 113-6) As a special suggestion effect, the special suggestion effect execution means changes until the first special suggestion effect (for example, the relief time reduction is established), which makes it easy to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. A fanning effect that makes it possible to specify the number of times and a countdown effect) and a second special suggestion effect (for example, a relief time reduction) that makes it difficult to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is satisfied than the first special suggestion effect. Although the period until the establishment is shown, it may be possible to execute an effect effect or a telop display effect) that shows the number of fluctuations until the relief time is established to the extent that it cannot be specified. According to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be improved.

(Means 113-7) A special suggestion effect is provided by providing a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the variable display is not executed and the hold information is not stored in the hold storage means. The execution means can execute the special suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) when the predetermined image is displayed (for example, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate. The execution order of the image display and the suggestion effect may be either first or at the same time), and a predetermined image is determined according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. The rate at which the special suggestion effect is executed may be different when is displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the special suggestion effect may be different when the predetermined image is displayed, depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the special suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of times the symbol fluctuates is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without causing a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on performing a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit), there was something controlled to a probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the symbol variation is frequently executed) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, the interest when the special condition of the variable display number is satisfied is insufficient. Met. Therefore, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 114-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation display, and a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. ) (For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) and numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter). An updateable update means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) is provided, and the update means includes a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a second identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of is executed (for example, the part where the game control computer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variable in the state control means. By setting a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times of display execution (for example, 800 times), it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied. Yes (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and when a special display result (for example, a time saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. The advantage of the special state, which can be controlled to the special state (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B) and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is derived from the special display result. Higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when displayed (see FIG. 9-6), the state control means is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display of the special display result. Based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the special state of the advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B). , When special conditions are met In addition, a notification effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS806B) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect) for notifying the establishment is further provided, and the notification effect execution means is special. When the special condition is satisfied while the display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derivation display, the notification effect can be executed (for example, when the relief time reduction is satisfied in the time reduction state). (Or only when the relief time reduction is established in the time reduction state), the time reduction rush effect is executed). According to such a configuration, when the special condition is satisfied while the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display, it is possible to give a special feeling by the notification effect. You can improve your interest.

(Means 114-2) The notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and in the special state. Depending on the time, the effect mode of the notification effect is different (for example, the time saving rush effect is executed when the normal state is controlled to the relief state, and the number of time reductions is increased when the time saving state is controlled to the relief state. (Perform the time saving promotion effect shown). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player and improve the interest by performing the notification effect in a manner suitable for the situation.

It should be noted that the variation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and the variation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state can be used as an effect mode of the notification effect (time reduction rush effect, time reduction promotion effect) performed during the fluctuation. It may be configured differently. For example, a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state are used, and the symbol is stopped and then next. It may be configured so that the effect mode of the notification effect performed during the symbol determination period until the start of the fluctuation of is different. In that case, a common effect may be performed as the effect during fluctuation.

(Means 114-3) A launch promotion notification means capable of executing a launch promotion notification (for example, a right-handed notification that displays a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 on the image display device 5) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward a special route. The launch promotion notification means can execute the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, an image). The right-handed notification for displaying the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 on the display device 5 may be executed when the time-saving state is controlled to the relief time reduction, and may not be executed when the time-saving state is controlled to the relief time reduction). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production.

When the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the execution of the launch promotion notification may be prohibited as long as the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted, or the special condition is satisfied in the normal state. The launch promotion notification may be executed in a more passive manner than the case. For example, the display range may be reduced or an arrow may be transmitted to perform a launch promotion notification. Further, when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, the image display device 5 having a high degree of attention of the player gives a launch promotion notification, while when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the degree of attention of the player is the image display device 5. A lower light emitting member or speakers 8L, 8R may be used to perform launch promotion notification.

In addition, the launch promotion notification means includes a first launch promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special route when a special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and a special route during control of the special state. The second launch promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium toward 2 It may be possible to execute the launch promotion notification. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production while performing the notification according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) The effect mode of the notification effect is the same when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and when the special condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, the relief time is shortened from the normal state). The effect to be executed at the time and the effect to be executed when the time saving state is controlled to the relief time saving may be common). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of effect data, and reduce the storage capacity.

(Means 114-5) When shifting from the normal state to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the specific suggestion effect for the variable display executed after the establishment of the special condition is restricted, while the establishment of the special condition. When transitioning from a low-advantage special state (for example, a time-saving state via a time-saving loss of 100 times of time reduction) to a high-advantage special state (for example, a time-saving state via a relief time reduction of 800 times of time reduction) based on the above. , It may be possible to execute a specific suggestion effect for the variable display to be executed after the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform a specific suggestion effect while suppressing the occurrence of defects in the effect.

(Means 114-6) In a special state, a special suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a special suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition may be provided. According to such a configuration, in a special state, it is possible to expect the establishment of special conditions and improve the interest.

It should be noted that the production mode of the special suggestion effect may be different between the normal state and the time saving state. For example, the character color of the countdown effect and the color and pattern of the effect of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (means 114-7). For example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the portion in which steps S1717A and S1717B are performed) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is such that the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern may be higher than that of the special state controlled based on what is done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the ratio of selecting the deviation of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is high even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. Therefore, the stress given to the player can be reduced by configuring the variation pattern having a short variation time to be easily selected in the out-of-time variation of the time reduction state via the relief time reduction.

(Means 114-8) Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect (for example, step S1717A in the game control microcomputer 100). The variable display pattern determining means is provided with S1717B), and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is more controlled than the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result. , When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern may be low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the rate of selecting the reach loss is high, so the relief time is shortened. The stress given to the player can be reduced by configuring the variation pattern of the out-of-reach to be difficult to select in the short time state.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of times the symbol fluctuates is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without causing a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on performing a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit), there was something controlled to a probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the symbol variation is frequently executed) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in control in the gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number of times. Therefore, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 115-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of The first passage area (for example, the first starting winning opening) provided at a position where the game medium passing through the specific route (for example, the left side region) can pass, and the special route (for example, the right side region) different from the specific route. The second passing area (for example, the second starting winning opening) provided at a position where the game medium passing through the above can pass, and the first starting condition (for example, the first starting winning opening) as a variable display of the identification information. The variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the game ball winning) and the second identification information based on the establishment of the second starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening). A variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display (for example, a portion for executing steps S110A to S113A in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special state (for example, a portion in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal state). A state control means that can be controlled to a time saving state (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), and numerical information (for example, a relief time saving number counter). ) Is updatable (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the update means includes a case where the first variable display of the identification information is executed and a second. Numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the identification information is executed (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the second start condition is the game medium in the second passage area. Is established based on the passage of, and the state control means is a specific value (for example, the number of times of saving time reduction) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the numerical information updated by the updating means is executed for the variable display. When the special condition is satisfied, the value of the counter becomes "0"), so that the special state can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has steps 061IWS5606A to S5607). A, S5606B to S5607B), it is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and it is controlled after the advantageous state. It is possible to distinguish between a special state (for example, a time saving state via a jackpot (time saving state A)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a time saving state via a relief time saving (time saving state C)). A special output means capable of executing a special output (for example, 2 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) and a specific output (for example,) that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward a special path in a special state. The specific output means capable of executing the test signal (output of the launch position designation signal and the right-handed test signal) corresponding to the right-handed striking is further provided, and the specific output means is provided with a special state controlled after the advantageous state and a special state. It is possible to execute a specific output in common with a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the opportunity to be controlled to the special state, and it is possible to standardize the specific output. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the trigger for being controlled in the time saving state is the occurrence of a big hit or the relief time saving.

(Means 115-2) The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B), and the special output means has a special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a time saving state via a time saving deviation (time saving state B)). , Executes a special output (for example, output of 3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) that can be distinguished from a special state (for example, a time saving state via relief time saving (time saving state C)) that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. It may be possible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the opportunity to be controlled to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the trigger for being controlled in the time saving state is the time saving out-of-time symbol stop or the relief time saving.

(Means 115-3) The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, for game control). The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed. (See FIG. 9-6), and when the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can control the special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example,). , The portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 115-4) The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, for game control). The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 9-6), and when the special display result is derived and displayed when the special condition is satisfied, the signal control means (see FIG. 9-6) that performs processing related to the output of the signal that can identify that the special display result is derived and displayed. For example, even if the fluctuation is a relief time reduction, when the time reduction deviation symbol is stopped and displayed, a signal (for example, 3 jackpot signals) that can identify that fact may be provided. According to such a configuration, the display result can be appropriately notified to the outside.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 8A) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 061IWS5607A, An update means (for example, for game control) that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on execution of S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 and variable display. The state control means includes a portion in which the microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. When the special condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the updating means has a variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether it is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the variable display is executed. A special state is based on the fact that a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 108 IWS811) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) and a special condition are satisfied. A special notification effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS806B) capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect) for notifying that the control of the above is started is further provided. The predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, in the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less and 11 times or more. The execution rate of the notice effect does not change during a certain period). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification effect is the special notification effect in the display means. This is an embodiment that makes it difficult to see the effect display displayed before the start (for example, blackout at the start of fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification effect is an embodiment in which the identification information for the effect is difficult to see (for example). , Black out at the end of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. In this mode, the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state due to the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any one of means 1A to 4A, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (for example, an explanation regarding a relief time reduction (for example, a relief time reduction function). And display the telop including the explanation of the production in a short relief time). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A, a portion in which a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. ) Is provided, the variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special notification effect executing means is variable that the special condition is satisfied. After the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the display, the special notification effect can be executed (for example, in the variation display in which the relief time reduction is established, the variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction establishment is established. Is not used. Then, after the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, it is notified that the relief time reduction has been established). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. A portion for executing S112A) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. A buffer), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the update means and hold information stored by the hold storage means even when the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An initialization means that can execute an initialization process that initializes the stored contents of the backup storage means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) and backup storage when the power supply is started. A recovery means capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6). Part) and. According to such a configuration, a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the special number of times is stored before the power supply is stopped while optimizing the control by the initialization process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, a state of a high base flag) that can be specified to be controlled to a special state, and a special state. Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of the time reduction counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed, and special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the above and an initialization means (for example, a game control micro) capable of executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A portion where the computer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means is when the backup storage means holds the special state information, the execution count information, and the numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , In the initialization process, while initializing the special state information and the execution count information, the numerical information is not initialized (for example, while initializing the state of the high base flag and the value of the time reduction counter), The value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before power failure is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1B) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has step 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B). A variable display pattern determining means (for example,) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. , The part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means is a specific value in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, when the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the updating means is the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the variable display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means specifies the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. A specific variable display pattern can be determined in both cases where the display result is not obtained (for example, reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) in both cases of a big hit and a missed case). When the variable display result is a specific display result (which can be determined as a variable pattern), the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, reach (or particularly high expectation)). The variation pattern of reach) is more likely to be determined in the case of a big hit), and the display result of the variable display is specified in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. If the result is not obtained, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, at the time of relief). Immediately before it becomes short, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) at the time of loss is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) In means 1B, a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect effect suggesting that a relief time is shortened, a telop display waiting for a customer) can be executed. The suggestion effect execution means has a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to establish the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, a telop display including an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation regarding a relief time reduction (for example, an explanation of a relief time reduction function or an effect in a relief time reduction)). ) Is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 3B. The notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. Is higher in the case where the specific display result is obtained than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). (Period) is lower in the rate of executing the advance notice effect when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result than the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 5B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 4B. The notice effect executing means is provided with means, and the specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") is defined in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the case where the display result is not the specific display result. The notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that of the predetermined mode. When the variable display display result is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is less than the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is step 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs step 061IWS5603A, S5603B. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, game control) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, the first variable display pattern # M (relief time shortening rush loss)). The microcomputer 100 is provided with a variable pattern setting process), and the state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times of execution of the variable display. When the special condition is satisfied, the update means can control the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The update and variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and does not determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied, but uses the special variable display pattern. Further provided is a specific notification effect executing means capable of executing a specific notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect) for notifying that the variable display is controlled to a special state when the variable display is being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification effect executing means executes the specific notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display that is possible and the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the effect of the same mode as the specific notification effect is executed. It is provided with a special notification effect executing means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a time-saving rushing masquerade effect) for notifying that is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the special condition, it is notified that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is satisfied. A predetermined notification effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, full rotation effect) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode common to that before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the jackpot is the same as when the value is not 0. It is realized by being determined by the fluctuation pattern). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the variable display display result when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect (for example, shortening the relief time) for notifying that the control of the special state is started in the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, which is longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is provided with a notification effect execution means capable of executing a mode transition effect) for notifying that the control of the time saving state is started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) At the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied in any of the means 1C to the means 5C, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. Is output, and after the specific signal is output, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state is provided. According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 7C) In the means 6C, the signal output means extends the period until the start of the next variation (for example, the period until the next variation is started), which is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. A special signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process). According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, a left-handed route) can pass. ), A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of one start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition (for example, game control). The part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) and the special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route (for example, in the game state where the player is expected to hit right). It is provided with a special output means capable of executing an output of a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the computer is present, and a notification that the player is in a state of right-handed striking. Is satisfied based on the passage of, the second start condition is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage region, and the special output means is the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. The special output can be executed at the start of the special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement processing for extending the period until the next fluctuation is started) that is executed after the display period of is elapsed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is step 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B). A part that executes the variable display pattern) and a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion that the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process) for determining the variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and the state control is provided. The means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, and the updating means is the first. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means sets the special condition when the special condition is satisfied. A variable display pattern (for example, the first variation pattern # A) that can be determined even before the establishment is determined, and a non-specific display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. After that, the special notification effect executing means capable of executing the special notification effect (for example, the display of the background image corresponding to the relief time reduction) for notifying that the control of the special state is started is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable display pattern can be standardized when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A). When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display as the hold information, and the hold storage. A look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means (for example, an effect that stops and displays a special decorative pattern (chance eye), or a hold change effect that changes the color or shape of the hold display. , A zone effect that displays a special background, etc.) is provided, and the look-ahead notice execution means is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. While it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display when a special condition is satisfied, the execution of a look-ahead notice effect that targets variable display after the variable display that satisfies a special condition is restricted ( For example, execution of a look-ahead notice effect that targets the hold memory that is stored before reaching the change in the relief time and corresponds to the hold memory that is performed after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time. (Prohibit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect can be executed. Is an embodiment in which the background display in the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, the background image corresponding to the time saving state due to the relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to means 3D, suggestive effects related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, countdown effects and effect effects suggesting that relief time is shortened, telop display while waiting for customers, etc.) are performed. The suggestion effect execution means includes a feasible suggestion effect execution means, and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect in a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) before the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to the means 4D, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation of a relief time saving function or an effect in a relief time saving). Includes telop display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state is a step. 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps 061IWS5603A). , S5603B), and a variable display pattern that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A determination means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process) is provided, and the state control means is advantageous based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to the state, and when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the execution number of the variable display, the special state is satisfied. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied has a shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The rate of determination is high (for example, the rate of time saving via rescue time saving is higher than that of the time saving state via jackpot). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display being executed by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. Will be shortened, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state is a step. 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284 and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 steps 061IWS5603A). , S5603B, and a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a variable display pattern determining means) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, the first variable display pattern # C) corresponding to the execution of the reach effect. (For example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process), and the state control means controls the specific display result to an advantageous state based on the derivation display as the display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after it is executed, and the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that it can be controlled to the special state when the special condition is satisfied. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means has special conditions. The ratio of the special state controlled when it is established to the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. Is low (for example, the time saving state via the rescue time saving is determined by the fluctuation pattern that becomes the reach (or the reach with particularly high expectation) when the display result is out of order than the time saving state via the jackpot. Low). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display display result by the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result becomes low, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In the means 1E, a background display means capable of displaying different background displays in the display means depending on the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the background image is different between the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or the means 2E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the variable display) that can execute the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A). And the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. , A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and executes the look-ahead notice. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. The ratio of whether to execute the effect is different (for example, the ratio of executing the look-ahead advance notice effect and the execution of any of a plurality of types of look-ahead advance notice effects in the time-saving state via the rescue time reduction and the time-saving state via the jackpot. It is different from the ratio of doing). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the look-ahead advance notice effect are determined between the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be different and can improve the interest.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to the means 3E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. A portion that executes S112A) and a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage). A look-ahead notice effect (for example, a special decorative pattern (chance eye) that is stopped and displayed, or a color or shape of the hold display) that targets the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. It is equipped with a look-ahead notice execution means that can execute a hold change effect that changes the state, a zone effect that displays a special background, etc., and the look-ahead notice execution means corresponds to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. Of the variable displays to be performed, it is possible to execute a pre-reading advance notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, while the pre-reading advance notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display that satisfies the special condition. (For example, the hold memory stored before reaching the variation of the relief time reduction, and the hold memory corresponding to the change performed after being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is subject to advance notice. Restrict (prohibit) the execution of the look-ahead notice effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1a) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state), and a state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. The updating means is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In this example, the case where the initial value is set in the relief time reduction counter when a big hit occurs is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (big hits that are not given time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set for some jackpots. It may be configured as follows.

(Means 2a) In the means 1a, the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display. It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game because the display result, which is disadvantageous to the player, is relieved when the display result is continuously derived and displayed.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or the means 2a, when the updating means executes the variable display even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state), numerical information (for example, a relief time saving number counter) May be configured to update. According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being once controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

In this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated in the low probability low base (normal state) and the low probability high base (time reduction state) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be updated in three states of low probability low base (normal state), low probability high base (time saving state), and high probability high base (probability variation state), or low probability. It is configured to update the relief time reduction counter in all four states of low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability change state), low probability high base (time reduction state), and high probability low base (latent probability change). You may.

(Means 4a) In any of the means 1a to the means 3a, the updating means sets the numerical information to the initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, resets the relief time reduction counter when a big hit occurs). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured to be controlled in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. It may be configured so that the special display result is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured such that the variable display is executed a special number of times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information to be updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped. , The numerical information held by the backup storage means when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the execution of the initialization process) is set as the initial value, and the predetermined condition is configured so that the specific condition is satisfied. You may be. According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any one of the means 1a to the means 8a, the effect control means corresponding to the variable display is provided, and the state control means has a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times. It is possible to control to a special state, and it is possible to control to a special state of a specific period again based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times in the special state. It may be configured to perform a different effect during the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By changing the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 10a) In any one of the means 1a to the means 8a, the effect control means corresponding to the variable display is provided, and the state control means has a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times. It is possible to control to a special state, and it is possible to control to a special state of a specific period again based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times in the special state. It may be configured to execute a common effect during the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. Therefore, by intentionally performing the same effect, the advantageous state is obtained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1b-1) to (means 5b) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1b-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming area that is controllable to a jackpot game state) and can divide the game medium into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path). A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and variable display. A process execution means (for example, game control) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control and control of an advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. (Parts for executing steps S25A and S25B) in the computer 100 for use, and the state control means is provided when a special condition is satisfied when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It can be controlled to a special state, and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. When the data value is the first numerical value, the first process related to the variable display (for example, the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) is executed, and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the advantageous state is related. When the second process (for example, the accessory control process process shown in FIG. 6) is executed and the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means is in a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The third process (for example, the next variation postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next variation) is executed to control the game, and the game medium is launched to the first path in the normal state to play the game. In the special state, the game medium is launched to the second path to perform the game, and the launch promotion notification means to execute the launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process. (See FIGS. 8-46). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. Based on a state control means that can control a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and variable display is executed. The data value indicating the game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including the update means capable of updating the numerical information and the control of the variable display and the control of the advantageous state is updated, and the data value is changed to the data value. The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by providing a process execution means for executing the corresponding process and the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. The update means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the processing execution means has the first data value. When it is a numerical value, the first process related to variable display (for example, the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) is executed, and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second process related to the advantageous state (for example). , The accessory control process process shown in FIG. 6), and when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The third process (for example, the next variation postponement process for extending the period until the next variation is started) is executed, and the notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled during the execution of the third process is executed. It is characterized by being equipped with a means for executing the production. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the processing related to the jackpot is prioritized, and for example, the processing related to the variable display and the processing related to the relief time reduction may be prioritized.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement process, which is the third process, and for example, only the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the time saving state is executed without performing the right-handed notification. You may.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and the means 1b-2, the processing executing means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started, and the processing execution means specifies the numerical information updated by the updating means. When the value is reached, the special information is changed from the first information to the second information, and when the state control means controls the special state, the special information is changed from the second information to the first information, and the special information is the first. It may be configured to execute different processing at the time of information and at the time of second information. According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) The means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display, and the variable display pattern determining means is variable depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. It may be configured to determine the display pattern. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 5b) The means 3b includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determining means displays a display result when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. It may be configured to determine a variable display pattern having a different determination time. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1c) to (means 6c) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1c) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. The game control means is a game machine that can be controlled to a state), and includes a game control means capable of controlling the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display, and the game control means is in a normal state. A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more easily executed, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and a state control means control. The state control means is controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, including the state information control means for controlling the state information capable of specifying the state being displayed. After that, it can be controlled to a special state, and when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it can be controlled to the special state. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the identification information is executed or the second variable display of the identification information is executed, and the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state. Based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the state information is set as the second numerical value when the state is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and the special condition is satisfied. When controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, and the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when the special state is in the state. It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case where the information is the second numerical value and the case where the information is the third numerical value. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

As specific information, for example, a background specification command or a fluctuation pattern command should be transmitted in a form capable of identifying that the user is in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving. It may be configured as. In addition, for example, when a big hit occurs, a big hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes depending on the game state, and depending on which command is received. It may be configured so that the fanfare period and the ending period change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, the state information control means transfers the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value when the special condition is satisfied again after being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or the means 2c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured so that different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what is done. According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to the means 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means is special. It may be configured so that a common effect can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed) when the special state is controlled based on the condition being satisfied. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. There, the effect control means controls the state control means to the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured so that different effects can be performed depending on whether or not the effect is achieved. According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means can control the effect. It is common when the state control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. It may be configured so that the effect can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1d) to (means 4d) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1d) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. The game control means is a game machine that can be controlled to a state), and includes a game control means capable of controlling the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect corresponding to the variable display, and the game control means is in a normal state. A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and power supply is stopped. The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means has a specific value in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times. Therefore, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means depends on the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated, and the game control means can transmit predetermined information to the effect control means when the power supply is started, and the effect control means starts the power supply based on the reception of the predetermined information. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the display is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

In addition, as a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, an initial result may be shown, a change in the background, an effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and a suggestion effect by displaying on the demo screen or menu screen are executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, when the command for specifying the initialization is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect.

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means is configured to be able to transmit specific information that can identify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started. You may be. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

In this example, a command that can specify the value of the relief time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in 100 rotation units, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, ... 500 to 599 rotations can be specified, and so on. If the value of the time reduction counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if it is 127 or less, a identifiable command may be transmitted.

(Means 3d) In the means 1d or the means 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control means is based on the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on specific information, and as specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is equal to or less than a predetermined value. It includes the first specific information (for example, a command for specifying the number of times of relief time reduction 1) and the second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, the number of times of relief time reduction). The command may be configured to specify the number of times 2). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

In this example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted. I can't be limited. For example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 specified command, may not be transmitted.

(Means 4d) In any of means 1d to means 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that (for example, each time a second predetermined number of variable displays less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the special number of variable displays is executed, the suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured to be feasible). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

For example, the effect may be executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter, or the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of fluctuations and executes the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter. It may be configured.

Further, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1e-1) to (means 1e-2) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1e-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. The game control means is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and includes a game control means capable of controlling the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect corresponding to the variable display. A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and power supply. Regarding a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times variable display is executed when stopped, and the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including information, and the state control means satisfies a special condition when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. When this is done, it is possible to control the special state, and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the effect control is performed. The means are controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and the backup storage means. After the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of Run. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. The game control means is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and includes a game control means capable of controlling the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect corresponding to the variable display. A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and power supply. Regarding a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times variable display is executed when stopped, and the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including information, and the state control means satisfies a special condition when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. When this is done, it is possible to control the special state, and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the effect control is performed. The means are controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and the backup storage means. After the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the above are initialized, different effects are executed after being controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition. do. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

After clearing the RAM (until the first big hit occurs), the selection of the fluctuation pattern table may be restricted, or a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables can be selected as in the case of the big hit. May be good.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to the feature portion 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is a variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of, and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes the special number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by becoming the corresponding specific value, and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, and the advantageous state is controlled depending on which of the plurality of types is controlled. The advantage of the special state controlled after is different, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. , The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, the special advantageous state is the probability variation jackpot, the specific advantage state is the normal jackpot, and the time reduction state after the probability variation time reduction is the normal jackpot. The advantage may be higher than the time saving state of, and the time saving state of the relief time saving may be configured to have a higher advantage than the time saving state after the normal big hit.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f in this feature portion 116IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the 2nd special symbol are different, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled in a short relief time depending on whether the jackpot is controlled based on the 1st special symbol or the jackpot based on the 2nd special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or means 2f, a disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is the first probability, and an advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting that is set to a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting value that is set to an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3f to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". And, when it is set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations which is a condition for controlling the relief time is smaller than when it is set to an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"). However, the advantage in the relief time reduction may be configured to be higher than the advantage in the time reduction state after the big hit. It should be noted that the one set to the disadvantageous setting (for example, "1") has a higher relief time reduction arrival rate than the one set to the advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), and the relief time reduction is always shortened. Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, the time saving number is 100 times after the normal big hit).

(Means 4f) In any of means 1f to means 3f, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the set value is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any of the means 1f to the means 4f, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display, and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, when a big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when a big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to means 5f, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 6f to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the shortening fluctuation pattern is determined at the time of loss rather than the time saving state via the jackpot. It may be configured so that the ratio is high.

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to means 6f, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect is provided, and a variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 7f in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern that reaches at the time of loss rather than the time saving state via the big hit. It may be configured so that the ratio to be generated is low.

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to means 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 8f in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the initialization process shown, the high base flag and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized, while the relief time reduction number of times is applied. The value of the counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than a state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and a start condition are satisfied and a start condition is satisfied. Variable display execution means that can execute variable display based on the above, hold storage means that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and power supply is stopped. When the data is set, the backup storage means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information, the initialization means that can initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the power supply are started. The state control means is provided with a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the backup storage means. , The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the recovered pending information, and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In order to apply the game machine of the means 1g in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, the relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are reset when the initialization process is executed, while the power failure is restored. The relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th fluctuation and the condition for controlling the relief time reduction is satisfied, the relief time reduction can be controlled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g in this feature portion 116IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the second special symbol are different, and when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol, the variation that is the condition for controlling the relief time is shortened. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or the means 2g, the disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability and the advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting that is set to a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting value that is set to an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the setting value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, when the setting is disadvantageous (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced and the relief time is shortened, as compared with the case where the setting value is advantageous (for example, "6"). The advantage of the above may be set to be higher than the advantage of the time saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the setting of an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of being out of order than the setting of an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), so that the relief time is likely to be shortened. Since the relief time is always 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, after the normal big hit, the time reduction is 100 times). May be good.

(Means 4b) In any of means 1g to means 3g, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the means is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any of the means 1g to the means 4g, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g in this feature part 116IW and each modification, for example, when the big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when the big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any of the means 1g to the means 5g, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 6g in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the shortening fluctuation pattern is determined at the time of loss rather than the time saving state via the jackpot. It may be configured so that the ratio is high.

(Means 7g) In any one of the means 1g to the means 6g, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect is provided, and the variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 6g in this feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern that reaches the time of loss is determined rather than the time saving state via the big hit. It may be configured so that the ratio to be generated is low.

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to the means 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 8g in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the initialization process, the high base flag and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized, while the relief time reduction counter is used. The value of may be configured so that it is not initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is an update means. The numerical information updated by is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition is further provided, and the suggestion effect is provided. The execution means differs in the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect suggests the period until the special condition is satisfied. It is a mode to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown effect in an aspect suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition to be controlled in the relief time reduction. The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 2h to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, a countdown effect in a mode suggesting the number of fluctuations, which is a condition to be controlled in a short relief time, can be executed. good.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or the means 2h, the suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of a color and a size is different, and is displayed in any of the modes. The period until the suggested special conditions are met differs depending on whether or not it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the aspect of the specific image.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, the color and size of the numbers to be counted down in the image of the countdown effect are different depending on the count value of the relief time reduction counter. It may be configured as.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to the means 3h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4h to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, the execution of the telop display waiting for the customer at different rates according to the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is established. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to the means 4h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5h to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, a telop display effect mode in which customers are waiting at different rates depending on the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. It may be configured to determine.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to the means 5h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect executing means includes at least one of the detection that the operation means is operated and the detection that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 6h in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, when the demo state is entered, the gaming ball is operated by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 or the game ball at the starting port. When it is detected, it may be configured to execute a telop display suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 7h to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, it is configured to determine the production mode of the telop display waiting for customers at different ratios according to the set value. Just do it.

(Means 8h) In any of the means 1h to the means 7h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 8h in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, it is determined whether or not the telop display waiting for the customer is executed and the production mode are executed at different ratios according to the set value. It may be configured to do so.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any set value from a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state, and a set value set. The setting suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect execution means are provided, and the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion is made. The effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the suggestion effect regardless of which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), the telop display waiting for a customer is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(Means 10h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h and the means 9h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is set. The setting suggestion effect executing means that can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means performs the setting suggestion effect according to a specific mode according to which setting value is set. The ratio of execution is different, and the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is the same regardless of which set value is set for the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h to the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), waiting for a customer according to a specific effect mode regardless of which set value is set. It suffices to configure so that the execution ratio of the telop display of is common.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to the means 10h, the suggestion effect executing means supplies power depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display and the countdown effect waiting for customers differs between after the initialization process and after the power failure is restored. It may be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) In any one of means 1h to 11h, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has special conditions. When the special variable display pattern is satisfied, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed, the special state is set. Further provided is a specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying the fact that it is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

In the feature portion 116IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using the first special symbol variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 9-8 (E).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to the means 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the variable display display result is a specific display result or not. Yes, when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the previous period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 13h in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the period before the predetermined period (for example, before 10 fluctuations) when the relief time reduction is established, the reach is reached at the time of disconnection. It may be configured so that the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern is low.

(Means 14h) In any one of the means 1h to the means 13h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the variable display is displayed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 14h in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the period before the predetermined period (for example, before 10 fluctuations) when the relief time reduction is established, a notice effect is given at the time of disconnection. It may be configured so that the execution rate is low.

(Means 15h) In any of the means 1h to the means 14h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect depending on the specific mode and the predetermined mode regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not, and the variable display is displayed. When the result is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 15h in the feature unit 116IW and each modification, for example, in the period before the predetermined period (for example, before 10 fluctuations) when the relief time reduction is established, a specific effect is produced at the time of disconnection. It may be configured so that the ratio of executing the advance notice effect of the mode (for example, the effect mode with high expectation) is low.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling the specific display result to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the derivation display.
An update method that can update numerical information,
Special state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
A specific state control means capable of controlling a specific state that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state,
An end determination means for determining to end the specific state by lottery in the specific state, and
Based on the determination by the end determination means, the normal state control means capable of controlling the normal state and the normal state control means
In connection with the control of the specific state, the notification effect executing means capable of executing the notification effect capable of notifying whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed is provided.
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.
The special state control means
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied.
When the special condition is satisfied in the specific state, the special state can be controlled after the end determination means determines that the special condition is to be terminated after the special condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized in that, when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state, the notification effect executing means can notify that the special state is controlled by the notification effect.

Images